JP7432312B2 - pinball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a pinball game machine equipped with a game area where game balls are fired.

Conventionally, among the various pinball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machine displays multiple symbols on a display area, such as a liquid crystal display, located approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "design variation" or "variation display", etc.). This gaming machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot, in which you can get more prize balls than in a normal game when the combination of symbols in multiple rows stops changing in a specific manner. known as a thing. The fluctuating display of symbols in the display area is not only about multiple symbols being displayed fluctuating, but also by changing the time of the fluctuating display in a state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, as in the so-called reach screen. Performances are designed to heighten players' expectations, such as making the game longer than before. In addition, players' expectations are heightened by the use of characters in symbols and other images to give a story to the fluctuating displays, and by previewing effects that hint at high expectations for the transition to special games. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2003-230714 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-73872

A pseudo-continuous variation effect is known in which the variation of decorative symbols, etc. is temporarily stopped and displayed during one symbol variation, and then the variation is displayed again, thereby making it appear as if symbol variation has been executed multiple times. (For example, see Patent Document 2). As such pseudo-continuously variable effects have become commonplace among various gaming machine models, there is a need to realize pseudo-continuously variable effects that are even more interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that uses a pseudo-continuously variable effect that increases interest.

In order to solve the above problems, a pinball game machine according to an aspect of the present invention is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed and a pinball game machine provided at a predetermined position of the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery. A winning/failure judgment is performed based on the starting prize opening and a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, using the ball entering the starting prize opening as an opportunity. a symbol display device in which a pattern is displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of the pattern determination; a pattern determination device that determines a pattern to be stopped and displayed on the pattern display device according to the result of the pattern determination; Variation pattern determining means for selecting by lottery one of a plurality of variation patterns having a predetermined display process; special game control means for executing a special game when the result of the judgment is a jackpot; an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to indicate the result; a effect determining means for determining the effect content including the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols in accordance with the variation pattern; and effect display control means for displaying the effect contents on the effect display device. As a production content, the production determining means causes a plurality of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, and then to display variation again, thereby making it appear as if a plurality of symbol variations have been executed in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation effect is displayed can be determined, and the effect display control means has content that suggests that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed. When a preview is displayed, a pseudo continuous variation performance is displayed with a higher probability than when the preview is not displayed.

Another aspect of the present invention is also a pinball game machine. This pinball game machine consists of a game board on which a game area is formed, a starting winning hole that is provided at a predetermined position in the playing area, and in which entering the game ball triggers a lottery, and As a trigger, a validity determining means for executing a validity determination based on a lottery value for determining whether to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game; A symbol display device in which a symbol is displayed in a variable manner; a symbol determining means that determines a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of a validity determination; a variable pattern determining means for selecting a winning result by lottery; a special game control means for executing a special game when the result of the judgment of success or failure is a jackpot; and a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols that visually indicate the result of the judgment of success or failure. an effect display device for displaying the effect, an effect determining means for determining the effect content including a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols according to the variation pattern, and an effect display control for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device. and means. The effect determining means executes a plurality of pseudo pattern variations by temporarily stopping and displaying a special symbol different from a plurality of decorative symbols in one pattern variation, and then displaying another variation as a production content. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation effect is displayed to make it appear as if the special symbol has been temporarily stopped. When a preview with suggestive content is displayed, a pseudo continuous variation performance is displayed with a higher probability than when the preview is not displayed.

Furthermore, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components and expressions of the present invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that uses a pseudo-continuous variation performance that increases interest.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the Pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing functional blocks of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a validity determination table. It is a figure which shows typically the range setting of the success/failure lottery value for each setting value. It is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table that is referred to in prior validity determination. It is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of a mobile cooperation system. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and a subboard. It is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of the main board in the Pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. 15. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing control start processing of a sub-board in a pachinko game machine. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. 20. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board. It is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. 12 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when the sub CPU receives a command from the control CPU. 5 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of decorative pattern fluctuation display. It is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. It is a flowchart showing the process of a small winning game. It is a figure which shows typically the example of a screen when making a button image appear on a screen in button performance. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process in an example of button production. It is a diagram of a table showing a plurality of types of effect patterns in which combinations of types of button images to be displayed in button effects are determined. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the 1st button effect in 2nd Example. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the 2nd button effect in 2nd Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process in an example of the button production of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of button production in 3rd Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation of the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button effect in 4th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button timer effect in the 1st special effect pattern of 5th Example. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button timer effect in the 2nd special effect pattern of 5th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button timer presentation based on the first special presentation pattern. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a preview scenario determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a table for determining the display timing of a button timer. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the button advance notice performance in 6th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in the button preview presentation of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the example of a screen of a button advance notice effect in 7th Example. It is a figure which shows typically the example of a screen of a button advance notice effect in 7th Example. It is a figure which shows typically the production process in the special production of 8th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the 8th example. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the 8th example. It is a figure which shows typically button production of a modification. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the special effect in 9th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the ninth embodiment. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the ninth embodiment. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the screen transition example of the special effect in 10th Example. It is a diagram showing an example of a scenario of special effects. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the 11th embodiment. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the 11th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 1st step of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 2nd step of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 3rd step of a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a table for determining the aspect of a pseudo|simulation connection effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of surface transition. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the button effect of 13th Example. It is a time chart schematically showing the production process of button production in the 13th embodiment.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine coexist. The second game is executed preferentially so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. In order to achieve both of these gaming features, it is equipped with a plurality of starting winning holes, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than the number of jackpot balls in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of winning a jackpot with a variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that constitute a special game in the event of a jackpot (the opening time of the jackpot is longer). A long open unit game with a long opening time and a short open unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is more long open unit game than the first game. (including cases where the number of games is large), the second game is designed to have a relatively higher profit than the first game. On top of that, we created a gameplay in which you aim for the first hit in the first game, and after you are given time savings by hitting the jackpot in the first game, you repeat the aim in the second game to get more balls. Realize.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a firing handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, Includes a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 is a frame body that has an opening and is used to fix the Pachinko gaming machine 100 at a position where it is to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that matches the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for firing game balls, a mechanism for removably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering the game balls to the firing rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides at the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game state and the performance by a means for controlling the performance. Most of the resin member making up the exterior of the door 104 is semi-transparent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors depending on the game state, performance, etc. by a means for controlling the performance, and plays the role of performance by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a gaming area 81 divided by a rail 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over approximately the central part of the game area 81, its upper part, and the right side, and is a decorative resin member provided to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60, and serves as a flow path for the game ball, and the effect display device. It has 60 protection, decoration, etc. functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game balls that have flown in roll, and depending on the way the balls roll, the falling direction from the stage 65 is the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11 and the direction in which the ball enters the first starting port 11. The ball is distributed to the side where the ball does not enter the ball. A movable accessory 66 is provided on the upper part of the center decoration 64, which is driven and performs a performance action according to the content of the performance. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) are installed to form a flow path for game balls. In addition, in this specification, "hitting a ball," "winning a prize," and "falling in" may be mutually synonymous. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entry hole may be configured with a type of "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which the game ball passes; ”, “Award”, “Failure” and “Pass” may also be used as synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting opening 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible for the player to aim the ball into one of them by changing the firing strength or weakness of the game ball according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided approximately at the lower center of the gaming area 81, and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11. If the ball is hit to the left, that is, if the ball is hit relatively weakly with the aim of flowing toward the left side passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can or will easily enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12, but if the ball is hit to the right. In other words, if the ball is hit relatively strongly with the aim of flowing toward the right-hand passage of the center decoration 64, the ball can or will easily enter the second starting port 12, but the ball cannot enter the first starting port 11. A channel is formed by arranging the game nails so that it is difficult for the ball to enter. However, under normal conditions, the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is covered by the first starting port 11, preventing the inflow of game balls, so unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12, it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball. The win/fail lottery is a lottery to determine whether or not to move to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is performed every time a ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Ru.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to the extent that it is possible to target either one depending on the firing strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be installed separately on the left and right sides of the gaming area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one is difficult to enter the other. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where the ball can enter the ball or enter the ball easily when the ball is shot to the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow toward the left passage of the center decoration 64. The second starting port 12 is provided at a position where the ball can enter or easily enter the ball when the ball is shot to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly and aimed to flow to the right side passage of the center decoration 64.

The first starting port 11 includes a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting winning prize detection device 17, an ordinary electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 90. Be prepared. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The first operating port 31 is provided at a position on the left side of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. The second operating port 32 is provided on the right side of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 usually triggers an opening lottery to determine whether or not to expand the electric accessory 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol, which is a symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display section 45. Therefore, the open lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery." After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stops. When the normal symbol stops at the winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12. In addition, as a modified example, the number of actuating ports may be one and it may be provided at a position on the left side of the gaming area 81.

The three general winning holes 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters.

The grand prize opening 20 includes a grand prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a grand prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the grand prize opening 20. The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects when a game ball enters the big winning opening 20, and generates big winning opening prize information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters the big winning opening. The big winning hole 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning hole that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big prize opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34. In addition, as a modification, another grand prize opening may be provided at the lower center of the gaming area 81 or above or below the grand prize opening 20, and a plurality of grand prize openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and is equipped with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball that passes through the out port 34 and is ejected, and generates ejection information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out opening 34 is provided at the lowermost end of the center of the gaming area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings can be guided and passed through. A specification may be adopted in which a plurality of out detection devices 39 are arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent ball clogging in the out port 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80. The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol reservation display section 71, a second special symbol reservation display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, and a regular symbol display section 45. Display sections such as a hold display section 75, a game status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77 are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display section 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display section 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side in the lower left position, and the first special symbol 51 and the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first winning/failure lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 11, and when it is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 12, and when the game ball is stopped in a predetermined winning manner, the special game A jackpot will occur. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are, for example, 8-segment LEDs consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". This is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, which are represented by a combination of segments, are not necessarily in the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols formed by a combination of segments that generally have no meaning. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (e.g. "-") and non-display (e.g. all lights out) are displayed. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined period of time, the symbol fluctuation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. The first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 are not 8-segment LEDs but LED dot arrays, and a plurality of types of first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 51 and second special symbol are displayed by combining the lighting patterns and lighting colors. A special pattern 52 may also be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to have a dramatic role, in this embodiment, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol at the lower left of the gaming area 81 It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display section 42. However, if a method is adopted in which the special design itself has a dramatic role and is expressed without using a decorative design, the special design will be displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of an 8-segment LED. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the

Above the first special symbol display section 41, a first special symbol reservation display section 71 is provided as a reservation lamp for special symbol fluctuations corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, a second special symbol display section 71 is provided. A second special symbol pending display section 72 is provided as a pending lamp for special symbol variations corresponding to the game. The first special figure pending display section 71 is made up of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) is determined by the number of lights or blinking lamps. (also simply referred to as the "pending number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display section 71 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the first start opening 11 during fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display section 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display section 72 is the number of times (number) of lottery values obtained based on winnings in the second start opening 12 during fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 or execution of a special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The number of pending lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display section 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the lighting combination of these lamps. First, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is expressed by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, and finally the stop symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. is expressed. For example, a winning stop pattern is expressed by turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp, a first winning mode is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp, and a winning pattern is expressed by turning off the first lamp and turning off the second lamp. The second hit mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

Further, on the right side of the normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol holding display section 75 is provided as a holding lamp for normal symbol fluctuations. The normal symbol holding display section 75 also includes two lamps, and displays the number of pending normal symbol variations based on the number of lamps lit or blinking. The pending number of normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during the normal symbol fluctuation, and the number of normal symbol drawings in which the normal symbol fluctuation has not yet been executed. shows.

Note that the symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game status display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The gaming state display section 76 is a display section that displays a display corresponding to a gaming state such as a specific gaming state described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting up a lamp when the probability is changing, blinking when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, and turning off the lamp when it is in the normal state, and a 7-segment LED when a special game is being executed. The number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in that special game is displayed. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that reports an abnormality in a part of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and reports an abnormality using a lighting pattern depending on the type of abnormality. Note that these display sections may not be arranged together in the symbol etc. display unit 120, but each display section may be configured individually, or may be configured separately into a plurality of display devices grouped together as appropriate. Further, the notification of a gaming state such as a specific gaming state may be configured to be made only for a predetermined period, such as a certain period of time after recovery from power-off, for example.

A performance display device 60 is provided approximately in the center of the game area 81 so that the screen is exposed from a screen frame formed by a center decoration 64, and displays a decorative pattern 61 that is linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Displays changes in the included effect images. Hereinafter, such a display will be referred to as a "symbol variation" or "variable display".

The performance display device 60 is a display device configured with a liquid crystal display that displays a decorative pattern 61 in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually presenting the determination result display of the lottery shown by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as a decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of symbols, simulating a slot machine game, fluctuate, for example, in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols consisting of numbers "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and are varied, and a win or a miss is indicated by a combination of three symbols that are finally stopped and displayed. Each of the plurality of designs constituting the decorative design 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors or patterns, but there is a picture or design common to all the designs for these numbers, letters, and symbols. It may be configured by adding different designs to each and integrating them. This pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the theme of decoration or performance set for the relevant model of Pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 can be switched in accordance with the development of the production, between a case where a pattern including the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The configuration may be such that the In the background of the fluctuating display of the decorative patterns 61, a moving image having a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for the relevant model of the Pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern fluctuations.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display that is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, and the width of its display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be large enough to be more than half the width of the game area. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball path on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the ball with maximum strength in what is called a "right-handed hit", it will almost certainly go through the right path. It is possible to pass the game ball to the ball, and it can be differentiated from what is called "left-handed hitting." The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes may be combined, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal, and the sub liquid crystal may be placed adjacent to the main liquid crystal, or a position other than the game board, such as a firing handle. (upper sphere, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured with a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured with a mechanical display means such as a drum rotating type, or a display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The performance button 109 is an operation input means that is pressed by the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the performance, and changes are made to the content of the performance etc. in accordance with the manner in which the button is pressed. The production button 109 is provided in the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the effect button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the effect button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the production button 109 function as a lever 112 in the state of protruding to the outside, and the player can grasp the production button 109 and pull the lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input predetermined instructions to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means by which a player inputs a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105.

The gaming method and control flow performed in the gaming machine configured as described above will be outlined. When the player manually rotates the firing handle 107, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one by the rail 82 and fired into the game area 81 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotational position of the firing handle 107, the firing of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. A game ball launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center decoration 64, etc., and falls in a direction depending on how it hits. When a game ball falls into each winning hole of the general winning hole 33, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the big winning hole 20, the prize ball depending on the type of winning hole is placed in the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. The ball is dispensed into the ball tray 106. A game ball that has fallen into each winning hole such as the general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball that has fallen into the out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The discharge of the safe ball may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the safe ball may also be guided to an area where the out detection device 39 is provided, and all discharged therefrom will be detected by the out detection device 39. You can also use it as Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which the number of safe balls detected and the number of detected out balls is added to the number of detected out balls as the number of ejected balls, without guiding safe balls and detecting safe balls by the out detection device 39.

Further, when a game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display section 45, and is stopped and displayed after a variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped and displayed symbols and the game state when the symbols were stopped and displayed. . That is, when the gaming state when the symbols are stopped is the normal gaming state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90. In addition, if the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during a specific game state (for example, an easy ball entry state), the normal symbol will be displayed in the second winning mode during normal and specific gaming states (for example, an easy ball entry state). When the stop display is displayed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the electric accessory 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long open are set to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol will win with a probability of 1/100, and in that case, the short opening execution probability (probability that the winning symbol in the first winning mode will be selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (probability of selecting a winning symbol in the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in an open lottery in a specific gaming state (for example, an easy-to-enter state), the normal symbol will win with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probabilities of the first winning mode and the second winning mode are the same as in the normal gaming mode. However, it is set so that the long opening will be executed no matter which way the prize is won. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, there is a function to change the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability changes from 1/100 to 99/100) and an extension function to extend the opening time (the opening time when stopped and displayed in the first winning mode is 0). .1 seconds to 6.0 seconds), it is easier to enter the second starting port 12. Note that the function (long opening) for extending the operating period of the normal electric accessory 90 is sometimes referred to as "opening extension".

In addition, as mentioned above, by setting the probability of long opening in the normal state to be higher than the probability of short opening, when the normal symbol is won, long opening will be executed at a certain rate even in the normal state. . As a modified example, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening, or the probability of both may be the same, or the specification may be such that short opening always occurs. good. Furthermore, when the ball is in the easy-to-enter state, it may be configured to use three functions, including a function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, to enhance the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 12. In this case, the normal symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy ball entry state. Note that the winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric accessory 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is held in the easy entry state. Furthermore, when the normal electric accessory 90 expands, it may be notified in advance, or the suspension of the normal symbol change may be predicted and the notification may be made before the normal symbol begins to change, or the normal symbol change may be notified in advance. It may be notified during the fluctuation.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is increased to about 6 seconds by repeating the opening for 2 seconds, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It may also be a mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of combinations of opening time and number of openings are prepared and one is selected. For example, when opening for 2 seconds three times, the total opening time is the same as when opening for 6 seconds once, but if the interval period is included, the former is longer than the latter. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, if the player notices the opening and changes the direction of ball hitting from that point on to the second starting port 12, the ball will be hit by the former. It can be said that there is a long chance. Further, it may be configured such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expanding mechanism may be different depending on the winning type. For example, when the normal symbol becomes the first hit, in the normal state it is opened for 0.1 seconds once, in the easy entry state it is opened for 1 second three times, and when it becomes the second hit, the normal state is In this case, the ball may be opened for 6 seconds once, and the ball may be opened for 2 seconds twice in the easy-to-enter state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, , and a decorative pattern 61 are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a predetermined variation pattern from the start to the stop of the variation. The decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable presentation pattern in which the manner of variation from the start to the stop of the variation is determined. Multiple types of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared, and each has varying lengths of time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed in accordance with the variation pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is variably displayed in accordance with the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. For each variation pattern, a variation display time is determined for each pattern as an end condition for the symbol variation, and the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 change when the variation display time elapses. will be stopped. Hereinafter, while illustrating the variable display of the decorative symbols 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern, the variable effect pattern will be briefly explained. Note that details such as a method for determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation effect pattern will be explained separately.

As an example of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols 61, first, when the fluctuation starts, the symbols in all three rows are fluctuated, like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine, and when the fluctuation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped one by one, so that the final stop mode is achieved. Display the symbol combination as. Note that the operation when the decorative pattern 190 stops fluctuating may be controlled so that multiple rows are stopped at the same time instead of one row at a time to draw attention to effects other than the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display, or in a shorter fluctuating time. It may also be possible to display symbol variations. In addition, as an operation when the decorative pattern 190 starts to fluctuate, the start of fluctuation of some columns is controlled to be delayed depending on the subsequent development of the fluctuation (type of performance pattern, etc.) to create a sense of anticipation. You can also do this.

Next, the variable performance pattern will be briefly explained. The variable performance patterns include a normal out-of-reach performance pattern, a reach-out performance pattern, and a reach-out jackpot performance pattern. The normal winning performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying an out-of-reach symbol combination after going through a reach-in state in which a jackpot is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The reach jackpot performance pattern is a performance pattern when displaying a jackpot symbol combination after reaching the reach state. In particular, the patterns that go through the reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time, and reach patterns with relatively short fluctuation times are called "normal reach," and reach patterns with long fluctuation times are called "super reach." ”. The normal out-of-reach performance pattern, out-of-reach performance pattern, and reach-to-reach jackpot performance pattern each include a normal pattern that is displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern that is displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second symbol fluctuation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the jackpot will change in probability or the probability that the number of unit games in the special game will increase will increase. Since this can be said to be a higher chance state than the first fluctuation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance performance may be used that indicates that there is a chance of a relatively advantageous jackpot. In the embodiment, a time saving pattern is used in the time saving state, but since time saving is involved in the variable probability state, the time saving pattern is also used in the variable probability state. However, in a modified example, a pattern for variable probability, which is different from that for time saving, may be used in the variable probability state. Alternatively, a specification may be adopted in which a common pattern is used for time saving and variable probability, or a specification in which a pattern for variable probability is used in a variable probability state without using a pattern for time saving.

In addition, when the number of pending lottery results reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of a loss is shortened compared to normal in order to increase gaming efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation"). Similarly, when the number of pending winning/failure drawings becomes 4, the symbol fluctuation time in the case of a miss is further shortened compared to the above case of 3 symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened fluctuation") in order to further improve gaming efficiency. ). When the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stopping state indicating a jackpot after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is started. The stopping mode of the decorative pattern 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a mode in which three types of symbols match.

There are two types of special games: a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a large difference in the profits depending on the winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called a start demonstration time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big prize opening 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after nine or more game balls have fallen, it is temporarily closed. The process from opening to closing of the big prize opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but it may be opened for a short time multiple times during one unit game. After the opening/closing of the big prize opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called an end demonstration time. Normally, in special games, you can fully expect 9 or more balls to enter per unit game, and you can get enough prize balls (also called "balls out") by playing 10 unit games, making a big profit. is obtained. A special game in which unit games are repeated 10 times is also appropriately referred to as a "10R jackpot", and a special game in which unit games are repeated 4 times is also appropriately referred to as a "4R jackpot". Although the unit game is repeated 10 times, in some unit games, the big prize opening 20 is opened for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds), so that the unit game is actually repeated a small number of times. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantially nR jackpot") similar to the above.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost nonexistent (such as 0.1 seconds), and the big prize opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The shortened special game is completed by repeating this unit game twice. In the shortened special game, the opening of the big winning hole 20 for a very short period of time is repeated only twice, so very few balls can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls actually coming out is almost zero or a small number (for example, only a few balls). This is a special game in which the number of payouts is equal to the number of payouts depending on the number of balls that enter one round, such as about 10 balls to about 1 to 2 balls per round. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also appropriately referred to as a "2R jackpot". Although the number of unit games is the same as the normal special game, it is also possible to realize a shortened special game by opening the big prize opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

In addition, if the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small winning mode after the above-mentioned symbol fluctuations, a small winning game consisting of one unit game is played. Then, the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game constituting a small winning game, the big prize opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the operation mode is similar in appearance to a 2R jackpot.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop symbol at that time is in a specific form (for example, "777"), after the special game ends, a probability change that is one of the specific games is further started. During probability change, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than in a normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the judgment result of the winning lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with variable probability, may not be clearly shown in the appearance, and may be in a latent probability variable state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, even if the game is changing with certainty, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether it is changing with certainty or not. In addition, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be indicated on the effect display device 60 whether the change is definite or non-definite.

In the normal game after the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state that is one of the specific game states is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the open lottery is made higher than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. Not only can the number of hits of normal symbols per certain period of time increase, but also the ease of entering the second starting port 12 increases, so there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will increase. Therefore, the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12 are increased, and as a result, it becomes possible to continue playing the game while hardly reducing the number of balls you have or gradually increasing the number of balls you have.

In the ball entry easy state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after a predetermined number of fluctuations, for example, 100 fluctuations, is reached. If a jackpot occurs beforehand, the time saving will end once. In time saving, the variation time of the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened, so compared to the normal state where the symbol variations are made with the normal variation time, it will take until the jackpot occurs. It is possible to shorten the time required to obtain a jackpot, and to relatively increase the ease of winning a jackpot. In a modified example, a specification may be adopted in which the time saving of the special symbol is not performed in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure of the Pachinko gaming machine on the back side. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the Pachinko gaming machine 100, and processes overall gaming operations, particularly the lottery when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content on the effect display device 60, and in particular changes the effect-like display content according to the determination result by the main board 200. The back setting mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in response to winnings to each winning hole. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The firing device 156 fires the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 into the game area 81 one ball at a time. The firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the firing device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display section 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display section 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, which indicates the ratio of the total number of awarded balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to any one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (settings 1 to 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning the jackpot can be varied depending on the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be to the player.If the jackpot probabilities from settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, then M1≦M2≦M3. The jackpot probability for each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a setting value that is set. It includes a setting display section 173 that lights up and displays, and a setting memory that stores set setting values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey type switch for transitioning to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") or a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, turn off the power switch 150, insert a setting key into the setting key cylinder 171, turn the setting key to turn it on, and then turn on the power switch 150 to transition to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. To shift to the setting change state, turn on the power switch 150 while pressing down the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, turn on the power switch 150 without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When transitioning to the setting change state, the number "1" indicating setting 1 is displayed as the initial value of the game setting on the setting display section 173, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory and the setting change is confirmed. , the state becomes playable. On the other hand, when transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. Thereafter, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned off, the game becomes ready for playing. Note that when the setting key is turned off and the game is enabled, the setting display section 173 turns off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clearing is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), the RAM clear is executed and the setting change state is entered. Furthermore, if the power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being pressed while the setting key is off, the power will be restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch in the setting key-on state, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display section may function as the performance display section 159 when in the game ready state, and may function as the setting display section 173 when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided so that game settings cannot be changed.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the functions realized using each configuration will be explained, but in this specification, in order to match the physical configuration and the functional configuration, for example, the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, etc., the physical configuration For convenience, the terminology may be used as is for parts that have already been explained.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a power supply board 158 that generates power to be used within the gaming machine based on alternating current power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the gaming machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operations of the game and the progress of the game. A main board 200 as a main board 200, a payout control board 155 as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the gaming area, and a control board 157 that controls performance operations and processing. It is configured in such a manner that functions are shared with a sub-board 300 as a sub-control device.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a special winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port). It is electrically connected to the opening 33b), the output opening 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and various control signals are transmitted and received therebetween. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by transmitting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the prize ball payout and the control state of the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200. At the same time, it also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The dispensing device 154 includes a dispensing motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball sending device 164, and controls the ball sending device 164 and the ball sending device 164 based on a shooting permission signal transmitted from the payout control board 155. The device 156 is controlled to fire the game ball. The sub-board 300 includes a production display device 60, a movable accessory 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), a speaker 108, a production input operation device 115 (production button 109, cross key 110), a decorative lamp 111, and an electrical connection. are connected to each other, and various control signals are sent and received between them.

Data is transmitted and received between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 in one direction from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. In order to realize the overall operation by transmitting and receiving data in one direction, each structure is connected to the main board 200. It is placed on the sub-board 300. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is maintained, data cannot be sent from the configuration included in the sub board 300 to the configuration included in the main board 200, and data transmission is I can't even make a request. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Furthermore, data is exchanged bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as with the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data may be transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. It may also be configured to transmit and receive data.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, firing control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modification, some functional blocks may be attached to other boards. It may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Further, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided into a plurality of substrates to form one functional block as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a regular lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small hit game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening/closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial processing execution means 280, main power cut-off processing execution means 282, It includes a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
Ball entry determining means 201 determines whether a game ball enters each winning hole. Ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 11 when receiving the first starting winning information, and determines that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second starting winning information. to decide. A ball entry determining means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the large winning hole 20 when receiving the large winning hole winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 33 when receiving the general winning information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 upon receiving the passage information. The ball entry determining means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 upon receiving the ejection information. The entering ball determining means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and causes the performance display section 159 to display the ratio. The ball entry determining means 201 determines the number of balls paid out ÷ the number of out balls when the probability of hitting the jackpot is in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low ball entry state). The value of is displayed on the performance display section 159. Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers for use in various decisions by the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the common symbol lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers from "0" to "65535" as random numbers (also referred to as "win/fail lottery values") used in the win/fail lottery by the first win/fail judgment means 221 and the second win/fail judgment means 222. A random number within the range is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in symbol determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. Random numbers in the range up to are generated by a predetermined means. The random number generation means 202 also generates random numbers ranging from "0" to "255" (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern determination lottery value") used in determining the fluctuation pattern by the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232. '' is generated by a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers to be used in the winning/failure lottery by the common symbol lottery means 213. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range from "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used when determining the normal symbol. Note that "random numbers" here include not only physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit and true random numbers in a mathematical sense, but also pseudorandom numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. But that's fine. Alternatively, it may be a random number generated by combining a hardware random number and a software random number. Further, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generation means, or may be generated by different generation means. .

<Puzu lottery means 213>
The normal symbol lottery means 213 generates a random number to be used for drawing the winning or not of the normal symbol and a random number to use for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32. 202 and execute the lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol validity determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the validity of a regular symbol, and a regular symbol determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of a regular symbol to be displayed on the regular symbol display section 45. Hold the table. The normal symbol validity determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for the validity lottery and the hit, and the normal symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol, and as described above. The correctness of the normal symbol and the stopping symbol are determined based on the probability of winning and the probability of selecting the symbol. When the lottery value for the normal symbol winning/failure drawing corresponds to a hit, the normal symbol lottery means 213 determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol by referring to the normal symbol determination table, and determines the lottery value for the winning/failure drawing of the normal symbol. If it corresponds to a miss, the mode of the miss symbol 1 is always determined. When the result of the judgment of the normal symbol is a hit and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, changes the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds when the opening is short and 6 seconds when the opening is long. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily suspended by a suspension control means 240, which will be described later. However, the lottery value is held on hold only if the predetermined hold limit number held by the hold control means 240 is not exceeded.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 has the functions of executing the first lottery related to the first game, including a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/failure determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination. The device includes means 231 and executes a first win/fail lottery as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the entry of a ball into the first starting port 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the first special symbol 51 is displayed in a variable manner in the first special symbol display section 41 by the main display control means 250. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second validity determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second fluctuation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol 52 to be displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display section 42. Further, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers from the random number generation means 202 for various kinds of lottery and determination by the first lottery means 211 when the ball enters the first starting port 11 . Specifically, the first lottery value for determining the validity by the first validity determining means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determining means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern. The first pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various kinds of lottery and determination by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second starting port 12. Specifically, the second lottery value for determining the validity by the second validity determining means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determining means 227, and the second fluctuation pattern. The second pattern lottery values for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 are acquired from the respective corresponding random number generating means.

The first win/fail determination means 221 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the first win/fail lottery value. The second win/fail determination means 222 executes a win/fail determination to determine whether or not to proceed to the special game based on the second win/fail lottery value. In the win/fail judgment, more specifically, "Jackpot" indicates a transition to a special game, "Small win" indicates a transition to a small win game, and "Small win" indicates a transition to a special game or a small win game. It is determined which of the following applies. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold a validity determination table that is referred to in the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the propriety judgment performed at the time of starting symbol variation from the preliminary propriety judgment described later, it is also appropriately called "properness judgment as main judgment." Note that in this specification, the term "table" or "selection criteria" strictly refers to a table structure that defines the correspondence between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating a choice. It does not only refer to data, but also broadly includes the case where such a correspondence relationship is realized by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter. Including these, the concept is essentially synonymous with "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria." In addition, when using a table structure, essentially one type of selection criteria may be configured by a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when referring to "multiple types of selection criteria", the subdivisions It indicates the actual number of types of tables, not the number of tables that are standardized.

The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective validity determinations as validity determination tables to be referred to in the validity determination. Specifically, the validity determination table for validity determination by the first validity determination means 221 (also referred to as "first validity determination table"), and the validity determination table for validity determination by the second validity determination means 222 ("second validity determination table"). It holds a table (also referred to as "appropriate judgment table") and selects the table to be referred to depending on the judgment to be executed. In the plurality of success/failure determination tables, the determination results of jackpot, small win, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the win/fail probability is determined according to the associated jackpot range setting. In addition, multiple types of success/failure determination tables corresponding to multiple game settings are prepared, and for example, for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the success/failure determination table has a different correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the win/fail determination result. will be prepared. Note that if the probabilities of jackpot, small win, and loss are the same among a plurality of game settings, a common success/failure determination table may be prepared for the plurality of game settings.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing the validity determination table. This figure shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a propriety judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the win/fail judgment table in this figure, the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss are associated with the win/fail lottery values, and the jackpot win/fail probability and the small win win/fail probability are determined according to the associated range settings. is determined. The first validity determination means 221 and the second validity determination means 222 refer to the validity determination table shown in this figure in the validity determination as the main determination. In both the first lottery by the first lottery by the first lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery by the second lottery, a jackpot is usually won only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. At the time of probability change, the range of jackpot is expanded, and a jackpot occurs not only when the lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the gaming state. In addition, in this figure, the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability is shown using a single success/failure judgment table, but the success/failure judgment table may be prepared separately for normal and variable probability. It may be prepared separately for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, if it falls within a predetermined range, it will be a small win. In the example of this figure, a small win occurs when the winning lottery value obtained by the first winning/failure determining means 221 falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, and the winning lottery value obtained by the second winning/failing determining means 222 falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the range that corresponds to a small win is wider in the first win/fail lottery than in the second win/fail lottery, and the small win is more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not correspond to a jackpot, it is originally a "lose", but in the example in this figure, the range of winning/fail lottery values when it does not correspond to a jackpot and does not correspond to a small hit. In particular, he describes it as ``outlier.'' In other words, if "win or fail" is understood from the perspective of "whether it is a jackpot or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in the broad sense of "miss" in the sense of "not a jackpot." In addition, when considering "win or no" from the perspective of "hit or not," a "small hit" may be considered to be included in a broader sense of "hit" along with a "big hit." Note that although this figure shows an example in which the judgment table for jackpot and the judgment table for small hit are realized in the form of a single judgment table, it is also possible to realize each as separate tables. good. Furthermore, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/failure determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the win/fail lottery value for each set value. This figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determining means 221 and the win/fail determination result. This figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second winning lottery value acquired by the second winning/failure determining means 222 and the winning/failure determination result. The range of the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value that result in a jackpot in normal and variable times is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", If the setting value is "3", it is 0 to 296; if the setting value is "4", it is 0 to 297; if the setting value is "5", it is 0 to 298; if the setting value is "6", it is 0 to 299. Therefore, the larger the set value is, the wider the range of winning/failure lottery values that will result in a jackpot in normal times increases the probability of a jackpot in normal times. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will result in a jackpot only when the probability is variable (in other words, it will be a miss during normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959, 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "3", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, as the setting value increases, the range of lottery values that will result in a jackpot when the probability changes increases, and the probability of a jackpot when the probability changes also increases. Note that the range of the winning lottery value is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability that is a jackpot in normal times and the probability variable jackpot probability that is a jackpot in probability variable times is constant regardless of the set value. In this diagram, the range of winning/failure lottery values is determined so that the jackpot probability during variable times is 10 times the jackpot probability during normal times, and is common to all setting values "1" to "6". . Further, the range of winning/failing lottery values is determined so that the probability of a small winning is also constant regardless of the set value. For all setting values "1" to "6", if the range of the first lottery value falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, it will be a small win, and if the range of the second lottery value falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535, it will be a small win. It's a hit. A range of winning/failure lottery values outside the range that constitutes a jackpot or small win is considered a "miss". In this figure, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence between the winning lottery value and the winning/failing determination result may be determined so that the jackpot probability is the same between different setting values.

<First symbol determining means 226 and second symbol determining means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stopping symbol when the symbol starts changing based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the validity determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the results of the validity determination by the first validity determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the results of the validity determination by the second validity determination means 222. A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination results. The first win/fail judgment means 221 holds a first symbol determination table for a jackpot to be referred to when a jackpot is won, a first symbol determination table for a small hit to be referred to for a small hit, and a first symbol determination table for a miss to be referred to when a miss is made. The second win/fail judgment means 222 holds a second symbol determination table at the time of a jackpot to be referred to at the time of a jackpot, a second symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol determination table at the time of a loss to be referred to at the time of a loss. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 select a symbol determination table to be referred to depending on the result of the validity determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "symbol determination as main determination."

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss, and FIG. 7(c) is a table to be referred to when the result of the judgment is a loss. This table is referred to when the result of the judgment is a small hit. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of the main symbol in symbol determination as the main determination. In each symbol determination table, a correspondence relationship between numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value is defined. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of jackpot, small hit, and miss, respectively, with "0" to "4" corresponding to the jackpot, "5" to "9" corresponding to the small win, "10" corresponds to a miss. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a jackpot and a probability change after the jackpot. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, it is associated with "0 to 99". 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with variable probability as a specific jackpot, and in the case of the first symbol lottery value, it is associated with "100 to 149", and in the case of the second symbol lottery value, It is associated with "145-149". Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with variable probability, and type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value being "150 to 189". The type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot with no probability change as a normal jackpot, and the type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each type of jackpot (that is, the content of the jackpot and the presence or absence of subsequent probability fluctuations) is determined by the size of the range of symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring the system so that one type of jackpot is determined according to the types of multiple special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of types of symbols and increase the number of jackpots. You can set fewer types. Alternatively, it is also possible to subdivide the jackpot into more types in response to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one jackpot type is determined to correspond to each of the types of special symbols selected during the first lottery and the types of special symbols selected during the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation ratio to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the entire range of symbol lottery values when the result of the judgment is negative. Therefore, in the case of a miss, it is determined that the same special symbol is always stopped and displayed. It is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed when the player misses.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". Type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100-149", type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150-199", and type "9" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200-255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area on the main board 200, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as the preliminary symbol determination table also in preliminary symbol determination. The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine that the value of "0" to "10" indicating the type of special symbol is the first lottery or the second lottery as a result of the preliminary symbol determination. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending items. In addition, as a preliminary symbol determination table, it is also possible to use a table that is further subdivided to enable complex determinations, or a table that summarizes and simplified the determination range of jackpot symbols for executing similar special games. . In addition, when a symbol is uniformly determined in the event of a miss as in this embodiment, a specific symbol can be selected without referring to the obtained symbol lottery value or without preparing a symbol determination table for the case of a miss. You may decide.

<First fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and second fluctuation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 acquires from the random number generating means 202 a fluctuation pattern in which the display process of symbol fluctuations to be displayed on the first special symbol display section 41 and the performance display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the one-pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determining means 232 converts a variation pattern in which a display process of symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined into a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. Based on this, it is determined from among multiple fluctuation patterns. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 each refer to the fluctuation pattern table and determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation when starting the symbol fluctuation. Further, the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 perform a preliminary pattern determination to determine which fluctuation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231, the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 have a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and a fluctuation pattern table to be referred to to determine a fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Preliminary pattern determination tables used to generate information for determining execution of prefetch processing at the time of ball entry are held or shared. The variation pattern has a fixed variation time from the start of the variation to the stop when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is essentially determined for each pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbol is displayed. fluctuation is stopped. It should be noted that the variation pattern determination executed at the start of symbol variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. Further, in order to contribute to the selection of a decorative pattern variation effect pattern to be described later, different types of variation patterns may be defined even though they have the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 refer to the table shown in FIG. 12(a) in the normal state, and refer to the table shown in FIG. 6(b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), in the normal state, if the judgment result is incorrect, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "3". 2". If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, select pattern range number "4", "Out of reach". For "no reach", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations, such as a 10 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 0 to 2, a 7 second fluctuation pattern when the number of reservations is 3, and a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds when the number of reservations is 3. When is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

In this figure, an example will be explained in which the variation is mainly classified into five types according to the variation time, but a plurality of variation effect patterns are prepared for each of these variation patterns on the sub-board 300, and there are several dozen types of variation effect patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "Out of reach" also differs depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" becomes narrower, and the lottery value of "Out of reach" The range becomes wider. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the higher the probability that a variation pattern with a longer variation time will be selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1" which is the super reach of pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123. If the number is 124 to 248, "Super 2", which is the super reach of pattern range number "6", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "Normal 1" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "8". 2".

In the normal state, if the result of the judgment is 2R jackpot or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3" which is the super reach of pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122. If it is 123 to 255, select "Normal 3" which is the normal reach of pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the preliminary determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called pre-read result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is a lottery or a second win/fail lottery and the number of pending items. In the example shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each success/failure determination result in the preliminary pattern determination. In addition to deriving only the information regarding which range the sub-board 300 is located, the control means of the sub-board 300 may be controlled to determine what kind of variation is to be executed together with the preliminary appropriateness determination result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all the variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence between the range of pattern lottery values and the variation time is the same as in FIG. 8(a) except for "No reach shortfall", which is selected for a miss. “No-reach shortening” is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as “No-reach, no-reach” in FIG. 8(a). For "No Reach and Missing Shortening", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reservations. When the number of reservations is 0 or 1, a 10 second fluctuation pattern is used, and when the number of reservations is 2 to 4, a 1 second fluctuation pattern is selected. are selected respectively. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery. It is not desirable for the player to have a situation where the hold for the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is executed continuously. Therefore, in the out-of-ball variation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a variation pattern table is referred to in which a long variation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations. It may also be a thing.

<Suspension control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reservation control means 240 includes a special symbol reservation means 241 and a regular symbol reservation means 242. The special symbol holding means 241 controls the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the previously acquired first lottery value or second lottery value when the first lottery value or the second lottery value is newly acquired. is displayed, the start of the symbol variation corresponding to the newly acquired first or second winning lottery value or second winning lottery value is suspended, and the winning lottery value is stored until the start of the variable display of the corresponding symbol. Here, for the first special symbols, the first win/fail lottery value, the first symbol lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, and for the second special symbols, each with an upper limit of 4 pieces, A second winning/failure lottery value, a second symbol lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The standard figure holding means 242 stores the standard figure lottery value acquired by the standard figure lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. These numbers of reservations are represented by the number of lights or blinking numbers of the first special symbol reservation display section 71, the second special symbol reservation display section 72, and the regular symbol reservation display section 75, respectively. The number of reservations made by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60.

The lottery value of the second winning lottery held in the special symbol holding means 241 is consumed preferentially over the lottery value of the first winning lottery, and symbol fluctuations are displayed. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery value is held as the first win/fail lottery, the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot is suspended in the first lottery, it is possible to win a plurality of consecutive jackpots by continuing to hit until a jackpot is suspended in the second lottery.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a regular symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the fluctuation pattern determined in response to the determination result of the first lottery by the first lottery means 211. let The first special symbol control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the fluctuation pattern determined according to the determination result of the second lottery by the second lottery means 212. let The second special symbol control means 252 also makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery that was performed previously has been completed.

The first special symbol control means 251 suspends the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first lottery when the special symbol holding means 241 stores the winning lottery value of the second winning lottery. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second prize lottery regardless of whether the special symbol holding means 241 stores the prize lottery value of the first prize lottery. As a result, when lottery values are reserved for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the lottery values reserved for the second lottery are read out preferentially and symbol variations are displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first win/fail lottery is not read out and its symbol variation does not start until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 by a command communication means 205, which will be described later, at the timing of starting and stopping the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is the judgment result determined or determined, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the variation patterns, and the value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. The ordinary symbol control means 254 causes the ordinary symbol display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol lottery means 213 as a fluctuating display of ordinary symbols.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other while displaying one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. The special symbol adjusting means 276 adjusts the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. 52 is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always used preferentially, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

The special symbol adjustment means 276 in the modified example adjusts the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. It may be selectively displayed in a variable manner. For example, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in the order, the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the order of fluctuations. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the winning/failure lottery values. Since which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, that is, the order in which the winning lottery values are held in the holding control means 240, it is easy for the player to visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modification, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined extinguishing order regardless of the order of ball entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are on hold, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are alternately and variably displayed. Since which special symbol should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the order in which the game balls enter, the player can easily grasp the order of change intuitively.

Also, when one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special symbol adjusting means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of the other. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols does not start while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Prior determination means 235>
The preliminary determination means 235 includes a first lottery preliminary determination means 236 and a second lottery preliminary determination means 237. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 stores various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 before the first validity determination means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the first special symbol control means 251 starts varying the first special symbol. The second lottery pre-determination means 237 stores various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before the second validity determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform various determinations. is used to determine information regarding the variation in advance before the second special symbol control means 252 starts to vary the second special symbol.

The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 includes a first preliminary lottery value determination table, a first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table, and a first preliminary variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for preliminary determination related to the first lottery means 211. Hold the table. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 uses the first preliminary lottery value determination table to determine the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery advance determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first fluctuation pattern lottery value stored in the special symbol holding means 241 belongs using the first advance fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, these determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information regarding the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by a command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing an a priori appropriateness determination table that is referred to in the prior appropriateness determination. The first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) refers to the first preliminary lottery value determination table of FIG. 9(a) when the ball enters the first starting port 11, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is between "300 and 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56,500 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning/failure determination result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (prior validity determination regarding the first game) is transmitted to the first starting port 11 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of balls into the game (indicating that it is a first win/fail lottery), the information indicating the number of balls on hold, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) refers to the second preliminary lottery value determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) when the ball enters the second starting port 12, and If the value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the prior validity determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64,000 to 65,535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, with reference to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, with reference to the second preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (prior validity determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second starting port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. The information indicating the entry of the ball (indicating that it is a second winning lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the performance determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

Note that the various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination results by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in predetermined preliminary determination result storage areas up to four pieces each, similar to the number of pending memories. Note that the preliminary determination result may be stored using a suspension storage area stored by the suspension control means 240. The information may be deleted based on the fact that the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmitting means 207), which will be described later. In this way, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected by sharing the area with other areas or erasing information based on completion of transmission. Further, as the judgment table for the preliminary judgment, a judgment table for the main judgment may be used without providing a table exclusively for the preliminary judgment, and the preliminary judgment regarding the first game and the preliminary judgment regarding the second game may be used. A part or all of a common preliminary determination table may be shared. In this way, by sharing the table with other determination tables, it can be expected that the data capacity on the main board 200 can be reduced. Note that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the preliminary determination means 235 may be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of validity, for example. Further, without making a determination by the advance determination means 235, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205, and the sub-board 300 may be used to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The advance determination unit 235 may refer to a preliminary success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence between the success/failure lottery values and the preliminary determination results differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. Similar to the above-mentioned win/fail determination table, multiple types of advance win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the prior win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set value of the game settings. In addition, an advance lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the validity may be determined in advance based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the preliminary validity determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior propriety determination table corresponding to game settings. This figure (a) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236, and this figure (b) is a preliminary propriety determination table referred to by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237. When the winning lottery value is “0 to 294”, the preliminary judgment result is “11”, indicating that all settings 1 to 6 result in a jackpot. When the win/fail lottery value is "295", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 2 or higher or in all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "296", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "13", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting of 3 or higher or at all settings during the probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "297", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 4 or higher or in all settings in the probability variable. When the win/fail lottery value is "298", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "15", indicating that a jackpot will be achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/fail lottery value is "299", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "16", indicating that the jackpot will be achieved at the normal setting 6 or all settings during the variable probability. Further, when the winning lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning judgment result is "21", indicating that it is a jackpot in all settings at the time of probability variation. When the win/fail lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary win/fail judgment result is "22", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 2 or higher at the time of probability change. When the win/fail lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary win/fail determination result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is set to 3 or higher. When the winning lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning judgment result is "23", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the setting is 4 or more at the time of probability change. When the winning lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the preliminary winning judgment result is "25", indicating that a jackpot is achieved when the probability is changed to 5 or more. When the winning lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning judgment result is "26", indicating that a jackpot is achieved at setting 6 at the time of probability variation. Furthermore, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary prize determination result is " 30'', indicating a small hit in all settings. In addition, if the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and if the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the preliminary prize determination result is " 40'', indicating that all settings are out of range. By using such a preliminary propriety determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary propriety determination result for each set value of the game settings.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 activates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first winning/failure lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game. It is determined that the conditions have been met, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 indicates a shift to a special game, the special game control means 260 controls when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. It is determined that the special game operating conditions are satisfied, and the special game is executed by opening the big prize opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big prize opening 20 is continued a plurality of times in succession, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special games include a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated 4 times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose open time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot is repeated only twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R jackpot and 4R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the jackpot 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is exhausted. In addition, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is met, the jackpot 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small winning game control means 265>
The small winning game control means 265 operates the small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20, thereby executing a small winning game. Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small win, the small winning game control means 265 controls the small winning game control means 265 to control the small winning game when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small winning mode. It is determined that the win game operating conditions are satisfied, and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big prize opening 20 to execute the small win game.

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the large winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the variable probability state, time saving state, and easy ball entry state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state, and an easy ball entry state after the special game ends when the special symbol is a specific jackpot symbol accompanied by a shift to a variable probability state. The variable probability state, time saving state, and easy entry state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is approximately shortened. do. However, in the normal state, by referring to the fluctuation pattern table according to the number of reservations of the winning lottery value by the reservation control means 240, the smaller the number of reservations by the reservation control means 240, the more likely a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time will appear. In the easy entry state, entry into the second starting port 12 is performed by performing at least one of three functions: changing the probability of normal symbols, shortening the time of normal symbols, and extending the opening of the second starting port 12. Pitch frequency (ease of ball entry) improves. During the probability change state, the probability that the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 is a jackpot is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 causes the second starting port 12 to be extended to open when a specific jackpot is reached, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. Transition to a variable state with a higher probability than the normal state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls opening/closing of the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 in the short opening or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second starting port 12 in the long opening time in the ball entry easy state. 2 Open the starting port 12. This improves the ease of entering balls into the second starting port 12 and allows the player to continue playing the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning hole solenoid 92 to open the big winning hole 20 in the special game.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power failure processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes a control start processing for the main board 200 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored from a power failure. The main power-off processing execution unit 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing on the main board 200 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. Note that the control start process, abnormality response process, and abnormality detection process for the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting change means 286, setting confirmation means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting change state to be entered as described above. The setting change means 286 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the setting change state is entered. The setting change means 286 changes the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →... in response to the press of the setting change button 172. , updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting changing means 286 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display section 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the RAM clear switch is not pressed and the power switch 150 is turned on while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state. The setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display section 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and updates the setting values stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173.

Note that the setting value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but instead the numerical values of "0" to "5". In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , the setting value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the setting value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the setting value data, it will not be judged as abnormal when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the setting value data is set to the initial value "0". can be simplified. Another advantage is that when performing some kind of lottery using setting value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each setting value in prefetch processing, the offset processing for selection can be simplified. . For example, when using "1" to "6" as set value data, additional processing such as subtracting the start address by 1 is required when using these values as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using "0" to "5" as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as is as the offset data. Note that when the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 use numerical values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, they may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173, or A value obtained by adding +1 to the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the gaming machine.

<Command sending means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of payout etc. to the payout control board 155, and a sub control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for execution of production control etc. to the sub board 300. It includes a command transmitting means 207. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command that instructs the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the determination of ball entry into each winning hole by the ball entering determining means 201, and sends a payout command to the main board 200. Sends a command indicating the status of the error that occurred. When starting the symbol variation, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the performance determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 controls the variation at the timing at which the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a fluctuation stop command are sent to the effect determining means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the main judgment is the judgment result determined or determined, the stop symbol, the value indicating each of the variation patterns, and the value indicating whether it is the first lottery or the second lottery. It is transmitted to the performance determining means 303 together with the fluctuation start command. When transmitting the fluctuation stop command, a value indicating the stop symbol is again transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the performance determining means 303 (sub-main) sends a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the fluctuating display of decorative symbols by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and the interlocking is maintained. Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303. After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, the winning openings (first starting opening 11, second starting opening 11, second starting opening) corresponding to the preliminary determination result are It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the type information of the opening 12), the information on the number of pending tickets, the gaming state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, the sub-board 300 realizes a process called "pre-reading" in which the sub-board 300 can inferentially recognize the validity result in advance, based on the received preliminary determination result, before the turn to start symbol variation comes around. Note that processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 receives information regarding the special game by the special game control means 260, information regarding the small winning game by the small winning game controlling means 265, information on the lottery result by the general drawing lottery means 213, and information set by the setting changing means 286. Setting value information for game settings is transmitted to the sub-board 300. The sub-control command transmitting means 207 also controls various controls on the main board 200 or sends information to the main board 200, such as information regarding initial processing and information regarding errors by the main initial processing execution means 280 and the main error detecting means 284. Information regarding various signals and the like is transmitted to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes a symbol mode determining means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determining means 303, a performance control means 304, a clocking means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power cutoff processing execution means 362, It includes a sub-error detection means 364, a command reception means 370, and a sub-side preliminary determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of effect patterns in which the effect image content and the display process to be displayed on the effect display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes. The production patterns include a plurality of variation production patterns in which the variation process and performance process from the start of variation to the stop of variation in the variation display of the decorative symbols 61 are determined, and the expectation level for a jackpot that is displayed separately from the variation display of the decorative symbols. The display includes a plurality of preview performance patterns that preliminarily suggest the height of the variable display before the display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determining means 303 includes a normal effect determining means 373 and a look-ahead effect determining means 374. The normal performance determining means 373 causes the performance control means 304 to display the information on the performance display device 60 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, 108, the content of the effect to be output to the decorative lamp 111 etc. is determined. The performance determining means 303 determines the content of the performance according to the setting values of the game settings transmitted from the command communication means 205. The pre-read effect determining means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal performance determining means 373 selects from a plurality of variable performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined by the first fluctuation pattern determining means 231 or the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205. One of them is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determining means 373 sends information on the read variable performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable performance pattern. Note that there may be cases where the normal effect determining means 373 determines the variable effect pattern by referring to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the variable effect pattern may be determined in conjunction with the content of the pre-read effect by the pre-read effect determining means 374. There may be cases where a performance pattern is determined. The pre-read performance determining means 374 specifies the main determination result with more precision based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205 and the past preliminary determination results and game state information held in the sub-board 300, and specifies the result. Based on the result, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before the main determination, and the content of the execution. Specifically, the look-ahead performance determining means 374 determines whether the current gaming state is in a probability variable game, and then shifts to the normal gaming state based on the prior determination result that is earlier than the currently received prior determination result. Determine whether or not to do so. Based on the determination result, determine the validity of the main determination and the selected variation pattern related to the preliminary determination result received this time, and determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution contents of the pre-reading effect based on the specified results. . Note that the performance determining means 303 has many parts in which the normal performance determining means 373 and the pre-reading performance determining means 374 cooperate, so the description will be given as the performance determining means 303 that includes both, except for particularly necessary parts.

For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The effect determining means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of effect images having the same variation time according to a variable pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 61 and their arrangement based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbols of the special symbols, the variation patterns of the special symbols, the decorations, etc. Determined according to the fluctuation performance pattern of the symbol. The symbol mode determining means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopped symbols to the performance control means 304. The symbol mode determining means 301 holds a symbol range table that should be referred to in order to determine the stop symbols of decorative symbols.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three symbols, and for example, when the result of the judgment by the first judgment means 221 and the second judgment means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of 4R jackpot or 10R jackpot. A specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. If the result of the judgment is a 2R jackpot or a small hit, a specific combination, such as "357", is selected, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations in which all three symbols are aligned. You don't have to. If the result of the judgment is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, it is a combination such as "312" or "946" where the three symbols are not aligned, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R jackpot or small hit. Combinations that are not applicable are selected. If the winning/failure judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern indicating a hit with reach is selected, a combination in which only one symbol is not aligned, such as "191" or "727" Select.

The variation presentation pattern of the decorative pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the presentation process from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation. The variable production patterns include a pattern when displaying a normal winning symbol, a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after going through a reach state where if one more symbol is aligned, it will be a jackpot, and a pattern when displaying a winning symbol after reaching a reach state. Contains patterns when doing so. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with varying lengths of time. For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is determined for each pattern as a condition for ending the symbol variation, and the symbol variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of a decorative symbol whose variation time is equal to that of the special symbol, depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In the time-saving state, if the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 is a time-saving pattern, the performance determination means 303 selects a variation whose performance content for time-saving is determined. Select a performance pattern. The time-saving production content is a production in which background video and audio are output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to time savings or probability changes.

The preview performance pattern is a performance pattern that temporarily displays an image, animation, or video of a specific character or motif on the screen, a performance pattern that causes a role model to move, or a performance pattern that outputs a specific sound. The performance based on the preview performance pattern is executed in parallel with the symbol variation, and it is suggested in advance that there is a high expectation that the symbol variation will stop in a jackpot manner. For example, there is a normal preview effect in which only one character image is displayed on the screen, and a group preview effect in which a group of characters is displayed as if they are passing from one end of the screen to the other. Further, a step-up preview performance is included in which the display process of the preview performance is divided into a plurality of stages, and the number of stages to be displayed is made variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The preview performance patterns include a pattern in which the display is executed at a timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state and foretells the final stop state of the symbol (post-reach notice), and a pattern in which the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-reach state. There is a pattern (pre-reach notice) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not normally stopped and a reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview performance on the performance display device 60 according to the judgment result of the win/fail lottery or the pre-judgment result by a predetermined preview lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and also sets the preliminary performance. Determine the preview performance pattern. Performance determining means 303 holds a preview determination table to be referred to in order to decide whether to display a preview performance, and a preview type table to be referred to when selecting the type of preview performance pattern. The preview decision table is set so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the lottery or preliminary determination, and the preview effect is displayed with a higher probability when the lottery is a win than when it is a loss. Thus, the correspondence between the determination result of the winning lottery and whether or not to display the preview effect is determined. Thereby, the display of the preview effect itself can indicate a high level of expectation for a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to variably display the performance image including the decorative pattern 61 in accordance with the selected variable performance pattern data. The effect control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start changing the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance determining means 303 determines that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 displays a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern on the performance display device 60 in a form that is superimposed on the symbol variation performance. let

The performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first winning/failure drawing when the winning/failure drawing value of the second winning/failure drawing is stored, and determines whether the winning/failure drawing value of the first winning/failure drawing is stored. Irrespective of whether the lottery is successful or not, the symbol variation display corresponding to the second lottery is started. As a result, if the lottery values for both the first lottery and the second lottery are held, the lottery values held for the second lottery are read out preferentially, and changes in the decorative symbols are displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value held in the first win/fail lottery is not read out and the decorative symbol does not start changing until the number of holds in the second win/fail lottery becomes 0. In this way, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display a pattern variation effect including a variable display of the decorative patterns 61.

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66. The performance control means 304 includes a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The effect display control means 305 controls the display on the effect display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is displayed in a variable manner, but in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is treated as the main performance content. A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the fact that the symbols are changing is presented to the player by displaying an alternative symbol which is a decorative symbol smaller in size than the normal sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from an alternative pattern, a normal-sized decorative pattern is also referred to as a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern."

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative design is a form of decorative design for visually indicating the result of judgment, and has a display form that is simpler (in other words, simplified or simplified) than the normal decorative design, and It is displayed in a more simplified variation process. The alternative design usually has a display form on the appearance corresponding to the part indicating the design type of the decorative design, and has a display form showing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the design type, for example. Further, the alternative design is displayed in a variable manner in a narrower area than the area in which the decorative design is normally displayed in a variable manner, and typically in a position where it is difficult to interfere with the main effect by elements other than the design, for example, in a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuations are displayed. Although the alternative designs are displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative designs, they have a display form that allows at least the type of the design to be visually identified. The alternative design may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

The plurality of alternative symbols displayed in place of the plurality of normal decorative symbols suggest a high degree of expectation that the outcome of the lottery will be advantageous to the player due to the combination of the stop modes at the end of the variation. For example, when a plurality of alternative symbols are used, a ready-to-reach state in which two of the three alternative symbol types are available suggests that the expectation of a jackpot in the variation is high. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state may be specific types of symbols that suggest relatively high expectations such as "3" and "7", and the symbols that indicate relatively high expectations such as "1" and "2". By using a type of symbol that suggests a relatively low level, it may indicate whether the level of expectation of the reach state is high or low. Note that the alternative symbol does not appear to be in a definitive stopped state, but is in a temporary stopped state in which a slight oscillation is maintained. After the alternative symbol is temporarily stopped, a normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal ornamental symbol may be displayed in a fixed stopped state. Further, the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern may not be displayed exclusively, but may have overlapping display periods. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued, and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative symbols, during the fluctuation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60, the special symbol is fluctuating with an image of the same size or smaller than the alternative symbol. A simple pattern that suggests something may be displayed in a variable manner. A simple pattern may be composed of a variable display of a combination of three symbols in the same way as a normal decorative pattern, a variable display of a single symbol, or a simple symbol (such as "○" or "×"). It may also be configured in such a way that they are sequentially switched. Simple symbols are not related to the variation display mode of normal decorative symbols or alternative symbols, and display a constant variation from the start of variation to the end of the variation of special symbols, and when they are stopped, they are related to the stop display mode of normal decorative symbols. may be displayed. It should be noted that the simple symbol may be one that at least gives a hint that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbol, and can be changed as appropriate, such as displaying a combination of two symbols. Further, the simple design may be called a "sub-decorative design", "sub-decoration design", "mini-decoration design", "mini-decoration design", etc. Apart from the effect display device 60, a variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern, which shows a display equivalent to a simple pattern using a light emitting mode such as an LED, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) when a malfunction occurs in the performance display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the 4th symbol, the LED lights up sequentially in "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including turning off is also possible). The variable display may be displayed in a variable manner, or the variable display may be indicated by flashing in a certain single color depending on the type of special symbol, and the type of loss or jackpot may be indicated by the emitted color when the display is stopped.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for gaming. The clocking means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time since the power is turned on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit with a built-in battery that can continue to measure date and time even when the pachinko game machine 100 is powered off or during a power outage may also be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there may be slight differences in the time between each gaming machine due to individual differences or time differences, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, there is no difference in time between multiple gaming machines as long as the power is turned on at the same time. The possibility of this occurring is small.

The performance determining means 303 executes a synchronized performance that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronized performance is a performance that is displayed on the performance display device 60 during a synchronized performance period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of symbol fluctuations and the gaming state. The synchronized performance period lasts for several minutes, and its length is longer than the symbol variation time for one time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The performance pattern of the synchronized performance is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the reproduction of a predetermined music and video is defined in the performance pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for the synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

The synchronized performance is executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal game or a special game. Here, "during normal gaming" also includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. In other words, "normal game" includes (1) "normal game during fluctuating display" where the symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, (2) "normal game during fluctuating display" where the symbols are not fluctuating and the standby demo screen is not being displayed. ”, and (3) “Normal game while displaying the standby demo screen” in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the changing symbols being displayed. The synchronization performance can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling volume reduction, brightness reduction, etc. in the synchronization performance is (1). It may be different from when. In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information regarding the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the production button 109 or cross key 110, and when such operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronized production will be output. This will be suppressed, and priority will be given to screen displays such as performance customization using the mobile cooperation system.

The synchronized performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined music performance or video is played back at a predetermined time (referred to as a "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronization effect may be a time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time of every hour on the hour or half past the hour with reference to standard time. It may be. Alternatively, a time may be set that can vary depending on the date or day of the week, and instead of being set at regular intervals such as "every hour," the time may be set at different intervals, such as first after one hour, then after three hours, and so on. The interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. A variable setting may be used in which the time can be specified by a game store clerk for each game store. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronized performance is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification in which the timing is triggered by a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, a plurality of machines at a game parlor are turned on at the same time. As a result, once the predetermined time has elapsed, the same synchronized performance is executed at the same time on the plurality of gaming machines. As a result, the production is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same songs and videos are played at the same time, creating a synergistic and realistic feeling as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect can be obtained.

The synchronized performance function is similarly built into other game machines of the same model, and multiple game machines on the same game island are powered on at the same time by game store staff every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronized performance start time almost at the same time, and can execute the synchronized performance at the same time. This is called multi-device synchronized production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized on multiple devices, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized on multiple devices. It increases.

The performance setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes a history of game results and a history of performance results. The game result history is the result of the game that leads to the ball that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of balls hit, the number of prize balls, the number of jackpots, the number of probability changes, and the number of time savings. The history of performance results is different from gaming profits, and is a performance record that is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as being granted the right to change the content and type of the performance, or the right to make it easier for a specific type of performance to appear. This is information such as scores. For example, in order to score the number of appearances of a predetermined performance, the result of a mini-game, etc. and give it to the player, encoded information, such as a two-dimensional code, indicating the score and game history is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his or her mobile terminal, the points obtained through decoding and information on the game history are stored in the player's mobile terminal. A system for linking a gaming machine and a player's mobile terminal via a two-dimensional code will be described later. Note that the points mentioned here are necessary to expand the range of production customization described below, and the points must reach a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.) This is a specification that will increase the number of customizable items.

The performance setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of performance content options as performance customization based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, as performance patterns to be displayed during a special game, a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters, and songs to be displayed are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. That's it. Alternatively, a plurality of types of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern is to be displayed. In those cases, when a player's operation of the effect button 109 or cross key 110 is accepted while the standby demo screen is displayed, and a effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 selects the selected effect. Remember. The effect determining means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initial process execution means 360 executes a control start process for the sub-board 300 when the Pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or recovered from a power-off. The sub-power-off processing execution unit 362 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing on the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power-off occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power-off, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as a power-off process.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, a player registers as a user in advance by setting an account and password on a game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site using a mobile terminal 354. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 displays on the screen of the performance display device 60 a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of a mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") that encodes the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays the input screen for the password information on the effect display device 60, and allows the player to input the password information through button operations such as the cross key 110. By decoding the input password information by the performance setting means 308 and registering it as the player's identification information and performance score history, the game content and performance score status of the player up to the previous time can be inherited. Input of this password information becomes an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start performance customization for selecting various performance elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and performance progresses, the performance setting means 308 adds up the points given to the player as performance benefits from time to time and accumulates them as performance score history. You can perform performance customization at any time and select and set your favorite elements as various performance elements. Points for performance are basically added for each symbol change, and the higher the expectation of transition to a special game, the higher the score is awarded to the type of performance, and the higher the score is also awarded when transition to the special game.

To customize the performance, the player uses a part of the accumulated points, and depending on the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that make up the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 You can change the performance elements such as music to your liking. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through a button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements in accordance with the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable performance element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is provided. When the player operates a button to instruct the end of the game or performance customization, the performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and uses this to control the performance display. The means 305 displays it on the effect display device 60. The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his or her mobile terminal and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to obtain information and store it in the mobile terminal 354. Further, the information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 354 to the game history server 358 with a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with the player's own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and performance can be carried over to the next game. Also, by continuing to play the game for a long time, points can be earned as the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increases.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling overall gaming operations. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Entry signals from each ball entrance, payout signals from the payout control board 155, and the like are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning hole solenoid, the first special symbol display section 41, and the second special symbol display section 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). Further, commands necessary for performance control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the results of the lottery, the results of determining symbols, and the results of determining fluctuation patterns. Signals are transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a 2-byte configuration consisting of a combination of 1-byte command type data, so-called MODE data, and 1-byte command content data, so-called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating command type data and command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300. The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the type of instruction, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of the instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data.When the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that it is instruction type data; When the bit is 0, it indicates instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is designed to send 1 byte of data per data transmission, so two transmissions of 1 byte each are required to send 2 bytes of command data. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the same data is read twice in a row by the sub board 300, completion of the transmission and reception of that data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in a row, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and a production control device 313. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means that holds a sub control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined, display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined, and the like. A sub-control program including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and performance control based on the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the production button 109 are acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 using the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , controls the performance through audio output, lamp lighting, and character object movements. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to production control device 313. In this embodiment, an example will be described in which the sub-board 300 includes the production control device 313, but the sub-board 300 and the production control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but can be separated and connected to each other. It may also be formed as a separate substrate.

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the production control device 313. The production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means that holds material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a compressed state. The performance image data is an image used for fluctuating display or performance display as a performance object that indicates the judgment result of a winning/failure lottery, etc. For example, a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for a preview performance, a sprite image for various performances, etc. This is a material image such as a video to be used. The motion data is data that defines an action when adding an action-like action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and characters' lines that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified by the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display using the effect image data and motion data is performed. is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 performs audio output control.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and the compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, or as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing or image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image, and stores the generated display image in a frame buffer as a frame of a moving image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory that temporarily stores frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

Note that the data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" in which the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 is defined. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be called "schematic display pattern data" in which the outline of the effect display process is defined. For example, the general display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of effect display processes, such as the start and stop timing of fluctuation of decorative patterns, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the playback start and stop timing. . On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data includes detailed display controls such as the display order of sprite images to realize fluctuating display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order in frame units to display moving images based on motion data. The process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the production control device 313 reads "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the processing from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. and execute display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the production control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and are simply "display pattern data". ”. For example, when the effect control means performs a specific process based on display pattern data held in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In addition, in the modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data", and even if the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324. good.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the production control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modification, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the production control device 313 may execute the processing executed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also serve as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. In addition, the production control device 313 may have a hardware configuration in which the display control circuit 326 is not included, and in this case, the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. may be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes a production control device 313 in addition to a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, and a sub-ROM 312. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the production control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing executed by the production control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, or the sub ROM 312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub RAM 311 may serve as the control RAM 322, and the sub ROM 312 may serve as the data ROM 324. In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the production control device 313 is not included, and in this case, the processing to be executed by the production control device 313 is executed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312. You can.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the main board 200 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution unit 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings regarding the hardware such as setting the built-in registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is in the ON state (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S122), a setting change process is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N at S122), a setting confirmation process is executed (S126). Note that if the setting key is in the OFF state in S105 (N in S105), the processes in S122 to S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, a power-off recovery process or an initialization process of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the process at the time of power-off recovery is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on, or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power-off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not turned on (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N at S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y in S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is inspected (S110). As will be described later, if the processing had completed normally when the power was last turned off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 will have been stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 will use the checksum to Inspect the data in main RAM 291. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), the data in the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is executed to return to the state before the power was turned off (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and initial settings for various errors and communication initial settings with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Subsequently, the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared, and commands for various information indicating the gaming status are requested to be sent. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big winning port 20 are returned to the state before the power was cut off. Subsequently, processing is executed to notify the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared with 0, and the initial settings of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or the RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process to be described later, and the operation of the interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt is generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) from then on, and the interrupt processing described later is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the setting change process in S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When using "1" to "6" as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when using "0" to "5" as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the process in S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the process moves to a setting change state (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N at S140), the process at S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N at S144), the processes from S138 to S142 are repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden to make the set value invisible (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process in S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting is to be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process in S154 is skipped. The process moves to a setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key turns OFF (Y in S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. The setting value is made invisible (S162), and the process returns.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power-off (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), a power-off memory is executed by inputting an unconditional interrupt request signal from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290. In the process, power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y in S206), executes processing for power-off. Therefore, the process advances to S212. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol, Initial value random number update processing is executed (S208), timer interrupt is enabled (S210), and the process returns to S200. Thereafter, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are disabled (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, and then interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed.

When a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power-off information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on is not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power-off information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at power-on has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, in order to inspect the backed up data in the main RAM 291 when the power is turned on next time, a checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and a loop is performed until the power is turned off. Note that the above-mentioned processing at the time of power cut-off is executed by the main power cut-off processing execution means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, interrupt operating conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd start opening valid period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), big prize opening valid period setting process (S332), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control Processing (S334), abnormality detection processing (S336), ball entry passage time abnormality detection processing (S338), game state display processing (S340), handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), firing control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and returns.

In the input processing (S304), the input port data of switches attached to the game board surface, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, door/frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal is monitored. , creates data indicating the input state and stores it in the main RAM 291. Note that the data indicating this input state includes level data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (data at the input port at the time of the current interrupt, and data at the input port at the time of the previous interrupt). (data indicating which switch was found to have changed by comparing input port data using exclusive OR).

In various random number updating processes (S306), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random numbers and the fluctuation pattern random numbers are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Further, a fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The respective random number values, maximum values, and initial values are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number values are incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. Further, if the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, that is, the random number range is completed once. Then, new initial values are set and random numbers are generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the initial value random number is set to 0. Similar processing is performed in the initial value random number update processing (S208) in the main processing (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting port effective period setting process (S314), the effective period of the second starting port 12 is set. The second starting port 12 contains a valid period in which the prize ball will be paid out and a lottery related to the second special symbol will be executed when the game ball enters, and a valid period in which the prize ball will be paid out and the second special symbol will be drawn even if the game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery regarding the symbols is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting hole monitoring control process (S326), during the invalid period of the second starting hole 12, the second starting hole winning monitoring process is not executed, so the game ball enters the second starting hole 12. Even if the prize ball is paid out and the lottery related to the second special symbol is not executed. The same applies to the case where a valid period and an invalid period are set for the first starting hole 11, the big winning hole 20, the first operating hole 31, the second operating hole 32, the general winning hole 33, etc. When the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric accessory in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric accessory in operation", if the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is not 0, the second starting port valid period flag indicates that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period. If the value of the second starting port validity extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in an invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the winning monitoring process (S316), the passage of the game ball through the switch is inspected, and when the game ball passes through the switch, the switch does not have an invalid period or is currently in its valid period, and the prize ball is paid out. If so, update the winning counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, sending command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting data received from the payout control board 155. Execute in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation port 31 and the second operation port 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. At that time, if the number of pending normal symbols is less than the upper limit of 4, the number of pending normal symbols is updated and the random number related to the normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal symbol is being controlled, processing related to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. If the state of the normal symbol is "Normal symbol fluctuating", the normal symbol fluctuating process is executed, and if the state is "Normal symbol stopping symbol displaying", the normal symbol stopping symbol displaying process is executed, and the "Normal electric If "accessory object is in operation", normal electric accessory object operation process is executed, and if "normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration is in progress", normal electric accessory object operation end demonstration process is executed. In the process during normal symbol fluctuation, after performing the fluctuation of the normal symbol, monitor the fluctuation time, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended, set the normal symbol fluctuation stop setting and change the state of the normal symbol to "normal". Set to ``Symbols are stopped and symbols are being displayed.'' In normal pattern stop pattern display processing, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern has ended, the normal pattern operation end setting corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In case of a hit, set the state of the normal symbol to "Normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory release extension function when the normal electric accessory starts operating, and start the normal electric accessory. The operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory opening extension function at the time is executed. In the case of a miss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "waiting for normal symbol change." In the normal electric accessory operation processing, if the winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the game ball are monitored and it is determined that the number of winnings of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings. executes the operation termination setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. If it is determined that the number of prizes in the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance to the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the ordinary electric accessory 90 When it is determined that opening/closing of the entrance of the prize opening related to the above is completed, the operation termination setting of the ordinary electric accessory 90 and the activation of the second starting opening are performed. Execute extension time settings. In addition, if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not executed. In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration processing, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 has ended, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol". "Waiting for change".

In the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol variation" and the value of the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is started. It is decided to start. When it is determined to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol activation pending balls is decremented, and the hit judgment, determination of the stop symbol, setting of the fluctuation pattern number of the normal symbol, and setting of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are executed. . After that, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol fluctuating", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for the normal symbol state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting hole monitoring control process (S326), winnings of the first starting hole 11 and second starting hole 12 of the game balls are monitored. If you confirm that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol is less than 4, obtain a built-in random number, and add the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the obtained built-in random number. It is stored in a buffer as a special symbol per random number used in jackpot determination. Further, as random numbers related to special symbols, symbol random numbers and fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired and stored. If the reservation of the second special symbol is to be extinguished in priority to the reservation of the first special symbol, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed, but if the reservation of the special symbol is to be consumed in the order of winning, In addition to updating the reservations related to the winnings, the total number of reservations is updated and the order of winnings is stored. Next, in order to request a preview production command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of winning the starting slot, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is the command transmission period, a winning preview production request, a winning symbol preview production request, a pattern notice. Executes performance requests in order. Here, (1) if you want to store the random number related to the first special symbol while you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated, (2) you are waiting for a hit and the normal symbol probability fluctuation function is not activated. When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored while the probability fluctuation function is not activated, (3) When the random number related to the second special symbol is stored during the jackpot or small win. , it is determined that it is the command transmission period. Next, a production command corresponding to the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls for activation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four pieces of preliminary determination information (prior propriety determination information, preliminary symbol determination information, preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. In addition, in the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of commands for preliminary determination processing, but in another example, when a ball enters the starting hole, the transmission is uniformly performed and pre-reading is possible. The sub CPU 310 may make various situational judgments such as whether or not it is a period. Next, the value of the second starting port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the valid period, the first starting port winning prize is As in the case, the second starting opening winnings monitoring process is executed. When the value of the second starting port valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting port 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting port winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, if it is confirmed that a game ball has won a prize when the number of pending balls is 0, the number of pending balls is once changed from 0 to 1, and then the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), a hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessory is in operation, that is, a big hit or a small hit, the special symbol control process is ended. If the special electric accessory is not activated, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general processing is ended, and if it is "starting to change", the special symbol is changed. A start process is executed, and if "special symbol is changing", special symbol varying processing is executed, and if "special symbol stopping symbol is being displayed", special symbol stopping symbol displaying processing is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the variation is started in order to start the effect display on the sub board 300. Request commands for additional symbol information, variation patterns, and character information, set the state of the special symbol to "Special symbol variation in progress," and clear the variation pattern judgment area used to determine the special symbol variation pattern to 0. . In the process during special symbol fluctuation, after performing special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time has ended, the special symbol fluctuation stop setting is set and the state of the special symbol is changed to "special". Set to ``Symbols are stopped and symbols are being displayed.'' In special symbol stop symbol display processing, the stop symbol display time of the special symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop symbol display time of the special symbol has ended, special symbol operation end setting is executed corresponding to the result of hit determination. In the case of a jackpot, in order to end the special symbol's operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the number of times the special electric accessory will operate continuously, and set the special symbol's probability. Deactivate the variation function, special symbol variation time reduction function, normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function, and normal electric accessory opening extension function, and prepare the state of the gaming machine for opening the big winning hole. Set the hit start demo display time, command request for hit start demo performance, and command request for firing position specification performance (command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended firing position such as "Right hit") Execute. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol In order to end the operation, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol change", set the state of the gaming machine to the small hit start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, and set the winning start demonstration performance. Execute command requests and command requests for firing position designation effects. If the result of the hit judgment is a failure, it is determined that the special symbol's variation time shortening function and the normal symbol's probability variation function have finished operating, the variation pattern selection state is updated, a command request is made for the gaming state, and the special symbol's In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol variation" and a command request for firing position designation performance is executed.

In the special electric accessory control process (S330), in order to execute the process related to the special electric accessory, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric accessory is inspected, and whether the condition device is in operation or the special electric accessory is in operation. If it is determined that this is the case, processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric accessory, processing in preparation for opening the big winning opening, processing while the special electric accessory is in operation, processing while closing the big winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, and small winning special call. Execute processing during operation, processing during closing of small winning large winning opening, and processing during small winning end demonstration.

In the grand prize opening validity period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of determining the validity period of the major prize opening 20, if the value of the major prize opening validity period is 0, the major prize opening validity period flag is set to If it is other than 0, the big winning opening valid period data is stored in the big winning opening valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored and it is determined whether the special symbol is in a state where variation can start. If the order of consumption of the reserved balls of the special symbol is priority consumption of the second special symbol, (1) the jackpot or small hit is not in progress, (2) the first special symbol is on standby for fluctuation, (3) ) The second special symbol is on standby to fluctuate, and (4) the number of balls pending activation of the special symbol is other than 0. When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the special symbol is ready to start fluctuating. It is determined that If the reserved balls of the special symbol are consumed in the order of winning, in addition to (1) to (3) above, (5) the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol is other than 0, and (6) the relevant When all of the following conditions are satisfied: the determination matches the order of consumption, that is, the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol is ready to start changing, the number of pending balls of the special symbol is subtracted, and a production command corresponding to the number of pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, a hit determination for the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or miss based on the special symbol per random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, decide on the design. In determining the symbols, if the hit determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the special symbol per symbol random number, if it is a small hit, the small win symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined. is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is determined based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the operation content of the special symbol probability fluctuation function is determined. The game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operating details of the variable time reduction function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Next, settings are made during the jackpot, such as the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession and the opening time of the jackpot. Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection state are set by selecting a variation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of the normal symbol. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set by referring to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, select the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, set the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state, set the start demo time and end demo time, and confirm the winning. The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short circuit power abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame open signal, and determines whether there is a change in the error state. If so, the error state is stored and a request is made to the sub-board 300 to display an error state representation of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled depending on the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display the error state performance is not executed.

In the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, which functions as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, and calculates the continuous on time ( For example, if it is determined that the value of the counter that is incremented for each interrupt when the switch is on is an abnormal value, the incoming ball transit time abnormal setting, command transmission request, and security output to the external information output terminal 160 are determined to be abnormal. Step through the creation of output requests. At this time, the light emitting mode of a light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the abnormality in the entrance and passage time. If it is determined that the continuous on time is not abnormal, no security output request is created.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory is activated in succession, the error state, the number of pending activation balls for normal symbols, and the number of pending activation balls for special symbols, each display is required. Create data.

In the handle state signal inspection process (S342), the handle state is inspected to monitor the touch state of the handle, and if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state as a result of the inspection, the handle state monitoring timer is subtracted and the handle state is Updates, sets the handle state monitoring timer, and requests command transmission for handle state presentation. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the handle state, a handle state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for special symbols, the display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, the display of the game status, and the special electric accessory are displayed in succession. Initialize the display in order to display the number of times the special electric accessory is activated, display the operating status of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the division, display the error, and display the prize ball ratio. , acquire and output display data in sequence.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting firing of game balls, setting of prohibiting/permitting firing corresponding to the communication state with the payout control board 155 and disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, and After acquiring the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In test signal output processing (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the big winning hole solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is acquired, and the output data of the big winning hole solenoid 92 is acquired. Executes acquisition and output data. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the production control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether there is a request to send a command to the sub-board 300, and if it is determined that there is a request to send it, the requested command data is acquired and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used on the main board 200 mainly include a random number per normal symbol and a normal symbol variation pattern random number as random numbers related to the normal symbol, and a random number per special symbol (hard random number) as the random number related to the special symbol. , soft random numbers per special symbol, random symbol numbers per special symbol, and variable pattern random numbers. In addition, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the initial value random number per special symbol are used as random numbers to give the initial values of the initial value update type random numbers. There are random numbers and soft initial value random numbers for each special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The random number per normal symbol is the number of pending normal symbol variations when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used for hit determination and stop symbol determination when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) to start the variation of the normal symbol.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes, for example, a value of 0 to 232, is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to suspend the normal symbol fluctuation when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is determined in the start opening monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won when the number of balls pending operation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , the value of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the generated value is generated by adding the two values, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per random number is used to execute the jackpot determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326) that a winning game ball has won when the number of pending balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4. , and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The symbol random number per special symbol takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. Stored. The random number of symbols per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a game ball has won when the number of pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). is acquired from a predetermined location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the hit determination is a jackpot in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is stored in a predetermined value in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that a game ball has won when the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326). It is acquired from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol have values in the same range as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are set as the random number per normal symbol, the random symbol per special symbol, and the special random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308). When updating the soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt processing is executed at fixed time intervals by a timer interrupt, various random number update processing (S306) and initial value update type random number update processing (S308) included in the interrupt processing are also executed at fixed time intervals. Ru. That is, the random number per normal symbol, the random number of normal symbol fluctuation pattern, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the random number of symbol per special symbol, and the random number of fluctuation pattern are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, the main process (S120) takes the time from the end of the interrupt process until the next timer interrupt occurs, that is, from the fixed time measured by the timer to the time required for the interrupt process. It will be repeated for the reduced time. The time required for interrupt processing differs depending on the gaming state, etc., so the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is different from various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. Thereby, the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random every time.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a control start process for the sub-board 300 in the Pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initial process execution means 360, but will be described below assuming that it is executed by the sub-CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initial process execution unit 360. When control of the sub-board 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs operations such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310. Initial settings regarding hardware are executed (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and among the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. By doing so, the sub RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Note that the interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 is executed with the highest priority, and includes processing at power-on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur when the watchdog function is enabled. The next highest priority level 7 interrupt process is command processing received from the main board 200, and the second highest priority level 3 interrupt process is CPU runaway detection using a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The next priority level 2 interrupt process is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupt process is communication processing with the real-time clock. There are various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, motors, etc. If interrupts related to the various types of processing described above occur at the same time, the interrupts with the highest priority, which is preset for each type of interrupt, are executed first. Note that the processing shown in this figure includes the processing at power startup, which is an interrupt with the highest priority level, the reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected, which is an interrupt with priority level 3. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for the model is set from all error information for all models stored in advance (S512). . All the lamps including the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the process does not return to this flow from the main process of S518, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. 20 is correctly placed in the main process of this figure, the start address at which to start the check is obtained (S530), and in the subsequent process. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and initialization operations of devices such as motors and solenoids are performed (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of missing decorative patterns becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is updated. (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in a method that uses a counter to determine the missing decorative symbols, in the case of a method that uses a lottery sheet that incorporates all symbol combinations that result in missing symbols to determine the missing decorative symbols. The process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed in S552 when a command indicating a stop symbol of the special symbol is received from the main board 200 as described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state, and when detecting various errors, notifies the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the production button 109 (S546), A preview lottery is executed (S548). In addition, in the preview lottery in S548, in order to send the command for the preview performance to appear immediately after the start of symbol variation to the production control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process is not processed in one loop but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and a preview effect that appears immediately after the start of symbol variation is drawn by lottery in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, or solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command stored in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command has just been analyzed, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y in S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N in S554), the software random number for lottery is updated as a low priority process that can be performed in free time (S556), and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the command to be analyzed indicates a variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation production pattern of the decorative symbol is determined in this process of S552, and if the command to be analyzed indicates a stop symbol of the special symbol, the lottery sheet is If the method is to use the method of determining the missing decorative symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the second highest priority after reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600), and the confirmed command becomes the first command. (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the process returns to the original routine. In this way, by acquiring a hard random number each time there is an interruption of a main command from the main board 200, periodicity does not occur in the timing of acquiring random numbers, and the randomness of the values is increased. If the data read in S600 do not match twice in a row (can be read up to 5 times), S602 is skipped and the process returns to the original routine (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), if it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command buffer (command data The command write pointer, which is the reading position in the ring buffer (for the ring buffer) is acquired (S610), and the first command and the second command are stored in the command buffer (S612). The command data stored in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command stored in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the process returns to the original routine. If the first command has not been received in S608, steps S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608) and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting commands related to effect display from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that transmission of command data to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that the command has been normally received on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628) and the process returns to the original routine. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N at S622), the process skips S624 and subsequent steps and returns to the original routine.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been successfully received. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), the command is stored in the command buffer (S634), and the process returns to the original routine.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for controlling lamps such as the decorative lamp 111, controlling the solenoids and motors that drive the movable accessory 66, and managing and controlling various timers, and occurs at a cycle of 1 ms. Since this is an interrupt with priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts with priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power outage are generated. , processes the input/output of a port that inputs/outputs a drive signal, etc. to a controlled device such as a motor or a solenoid (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating a power outage is input, the process immediately moves to backup processing. Data related to device control, such as count processing based on control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to ports in S642, is updated (S644), and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. (S646), updates the timer for managing the valid input time of the production button 109 (S648), and updates the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. A 16 ms cycle is created (S650).

Note that the minimum unit for lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of that as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, lamp control and image display control can be easily synchronized. Furthermore, when counting a relatively long period of time, such as a 30 second error notification, if one interrupt (1 ms) period is used, the count value will become longer than necessary; The count value can also be shortened by setting it as a cycle count value.

There are 16 types of tasks in the task control, processes 0 to 15, one task is lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is executed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned, for example, to process 0 and process 8, and monitors the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts (S652). By doing so, monitoring at an 8ms cycle is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is inverted on and off every frame, and if this toggle signal remains the same value for 1600 ms continuously, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and the sub CPU 310 The control CPU 320 transmits a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes the reset. Since a toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16ms or 32ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period, such as the above-mentioned error notification for 30 seconds, is subtracted (S654), and the error notification ends when the timeout expires.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process of special symbol variation display. If the second winning lottery value is on hold (Y in S700), the second winning/failure determining means 222 reads out the second winning lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is correct (S702), and The determining means 222 determines the stop symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second fluctuation pattern determining means 232 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and issues a fluctuation start command together with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to start symbol variation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second winning/failure lottery value is not held (N at S700) and the first winning/failure drawing value is held (Y at S708), the first winning/failure determining means 221 performs the first winning/failure drawing The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the validity of the first special symbol 51 (S710). A variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is sent to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not held, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

Process the symbol fluctuation display of the special symbol (S718), repeat S718 until a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed and the symbol display stop timing is reached (S720 N), and after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol display will stop. When the timing is reached (Y in S720), a fluctuation stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol fluctuation being displayed at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and end the special symbol fluctuation display. do.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the process of decorative pattern variation display. The effect determining means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the content of effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and stops the decorative pattern according to the received special symbol stop symbol, variation pattern, and validity determination result. A mode is determined (S752), and a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the precursor setting is turned on by advance determination (Y in S756), the already determined variable performance pattern is a pattern that includes specific performance content that should be avoided from being displayed overlapping with the preview performance. If not (S758, N), and if the symbol change is not the trigger for turning on the omen setting (S760, N), the setting to display a predetermined preview effect is executed (S764), and the omen setting is turned on. If it is a symbol change that is the trigger for turning on (Y in S760), the omen setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not on (N at S756) or if the variable performance pattern includes specific performance content (Y at S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Thereafter, the display of the decorative pattern variation effect is started (S766), the process of displaying the variation effect of the decorative pattern (S768), and the display process of the preview effect (S770), until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200. S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772), and when a fluctuation stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the stop mode determined in S752, thereby stopping the symbol fluctuation display (S774). ), the variation effect of the decorative pattern is ended (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the grand prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed ( (Y in S804), although the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), if the number of balls entering the grand prize opening 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the grand prize opening. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect is displayed. The control means 305 ends the production process of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, that is, the probability change, time saving, easy entry state (S818) ).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the big prize opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has elapsed (Y in S822), close the big prize opening 20 (S824), and if the set number of openings and closings have not been completed (N in S826), add 1 to the number of openings and closings and return to S820. (S828), if the set number of openings and closings have been completed (Y in S826), the small winning game ends.

In the underlying technology, there are generally more jackpot balls in the second game than jackpot balls in the first game, that is, one jackpot in the second game than in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a higher expected value of winning prize balls than the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected value of prize ball acquisition in the first game and the second game are approximately equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special games executed in the first game and the special games executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 7 times with a 100% probability, and in the second game, a special game is executed in which a unit game is executed 4 times with a 50% probability. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. In addition, in any case, a specific area is provided in the grand prize opening, and when the game ball that enters the grand prize opening enters or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends. It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is performed. In this case, the special game that is executed when a jackpot is achieved in the second game is easier to enter the specific area than the special game that is executed when the jackpot is achieved in the first game. may be configured so that the probability that a normal game with variable probability will be executed after the special game ends is high. For example, a first win in which a special game is executed that makes it relatively difficult for the ball to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area. The second game may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second win than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of winning the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of winning the second win in the second game may be 100%.

<First example>
The present embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the underlying technology, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (for example, a special effect pattern or a variable reach effect pattern) is selected, a button image ( Or a lever image) is displayed on the screen to prompt the player to input an operation, and a performance in which the display mode of the button image (or lever image) changes according to the operation of the performance button 109 (hereinafter referred to as a "button promotion performance") In other words, effects and images that use operating means other than effect buttons, such as the lever 112 and lever images, are included in the concepts of "button promotion effects" and "button images" when there is no need to distinguish them. ). As the button image, button images with multiple display modes, for example, multiple button images with different aspects such as color, pattern, shape, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. The level of expectations varies. The performance process of the button promotion performance in this embodiment is determined by the button promotion performance pattern, which is one of the special performance pattern or the reach variation performance pattern. In the button promotion performance pattern, a performance process in which the expectation level of jackpot can be stepped up in multiple stages after reach is established is defined, and a button image for prompting the player to input the operation of the performance button 109 for each of the multiple stages of performance. is displayed. As a condition for progressing from one stage to the next stage of performance or jackpot, operation input conditions regarding the operation mode of the performance button 109 are determined, and when there is an operation input that satisfies the conditions, the next stage of performance or jackpot is activated. It can really develop. Note that when it is written as "button effect" (or "button notice"), when the effect button 109 is operated, the effect being executed (the effect display on the effect display device 60, the sound effect on the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111) The term "button promotion effect" is also included in the "button effect" because it changes the button image displayed on the effect display device 60. In this embodiment (and the embodiments after the second embodiment), when the "button promotion effect" is executed, it is mostly accompanied by a sound effect and a lighting effect of the decorative lamp 111 (especially the lamp of the effect button 109). Therefore, in the descriptions of the following examples, "button promotion effect" will also be written as "button effect" unless necessary.

The conditions of the operation mode are determined in the form of the amount of operation such as the number of times the production button 109 is operated and the continuous operation time, and are determined such that the amount of operation becomes larger for each type of operation means image with a higher jackpot expectation. However, the "operation amount" here may be the average value for each type of operation means image, and for types with relatively high jackpot expectations, the "operation amount" may be an exceptionally small amount of operation, such as "one press". The specification may be such that the minimum amount of operation is given as the operation mode condition at random and at low frequency.

Further, as the operation mode condition, the length of the valid period during which the operation of the production button 109 is effectively accepted is further determined. The length of the effective period of the effect button 109 may be determined to vary depending on the amount of operation required of the player.

The performance determining means 303 can select one of a plurality of types of button performance patterns as the special performance pattern when a specific variation pattern is selected as the special symbol variation pattern. The button performance pattern defines a performance process that can evolve over multiple performance stages. At each of the multiple performance stages of the button performance pattern, which of the multiple types of button images is displayed to suggest a high level of expectation of a jackpot, and the next performance is developed for each type of button image. The operation input conditions that must be met for this purpose are defined in the button performance pattern.

FIG. 30 schematically shows an example of a screen when a button image is made to appear on the screen in button presentation. FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b) illustrate a button image 500. In the performance based on the button performance pattern, a button image 500 appears approximately in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 30(a) in each of a plurality of performance stages displayed after the reach is established. Around the button image 500, information suggesting the validity period of the operation input is displayed as an operation input condition in a first related display area 502 below the button image 500, and information indicating the status of the validity period of the operation input is displayed as an operation input condition. Information suggesting the status of the operation mode is displayed as an operation input condition in the related display area 504. At the lower right corner of the screen, a reduced decorative pattern 506 is displayed in a variable manner. At the start of the button effect, a character string such as ``Press the button three times!'' is displayed on the screen to guide the player about the operation input conditions.

In the first related display area 502, a number or the like indicating at least one of the elapsed time and remaining time of the valid period of the operation input of the production button 109 is displayed. For example, in the first related display area 502, the remaining time of the valid period of the operation input is displayed in characters such as "3 seconds left". As a modification, the elapsed time or remaining time may be displayed in the form of an indicator (meter display or gauge display). Note that the time display of the validity period displayed in the first related display area 502 does not necessarily have to display a number that exactly matches the validity period referenced in internal control; It is sufficient as long as it indicates the time. For example, the effective period of the production button 109 may start at a timing slightly before or after the timing at which the effective period starts to be displayed in the first related display area 502, and the effective period may be " The valid period of the effect button 109 may end at a timing slightly before or after the timing when the effect reaches "0 seconds".

The second related display area 504 shows the operation status of the operation required of the player in order to advance to the next performance stage or change the type of operation means image (also referred to as "promotion"). It is displayed in response to the player's operation of the performance button 109. For example, a number indicating at least one of the elapsed amount of operation of the production button 109 (for example, the number of times it has been operated and the time) and the remaining amount of operation (for example, the remaining number of times and remaining time) is displayed. For example, the operation status may include numbers, characters, or indicators (meter display or gauge display) such as "0 times," "1 time," "2 times," or even multiple objects consisting of figures (objects are One object may correspond, or the color or shape may be different and the number of operations indicated by the object display mode may be different depending on the object display mode). It is displayed in the second related display area 504.

When the player operates, ie presses, the performance button 109, a performance corresponding to the operation is displayed. For example, if the button performance is composed of a battle performance in which an image of a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character is displayed, an image of an attack on the enemy character is displayed each time the performance button 109 is operated. As for the attacks to be applied to the enemy character, the number of attacks depending on the amount of operation of the effect button 109 may be displayed, or the types of attacks may be displayed according to the operation mode of the effect button 109.

FIG. 30(b) is an example of a screen 1 second after FIG. 30(a), in which a button image 500 is displayed approximately in the center of the screen, and a reduced decorative pattern 506 is variably displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. In the first related display area 502, the remaining time of the valid period of the operation input is displayed in characters such as "2 seconds left". In the second related display area 504, characters "one more time" indicating the remaining number of operations required of the player are displayed. When the number of operations reaches a predetermined number or the remaining number of operations becomes "0," the type of button image 500 can be switched to a button image 500 of a higher rank. For example, the button image 500 of the aspect of the lowest first rank (for example, a white button) is displayed first, and when the presentation stage is promoted to a higher stage, the aspect of the second rank (for example, a blue button) is displayed. When the presentation stage is promoted to a higher stage, the button image 500 is switched to a button image 500 of a higher third rank (for example, a red button). In addition, instead of switching to the button image 500 in the third rank mode, there is a pattern in which the button image 500 is switched to the fourth rank mode (for example, a special button provided at the tip of a lever-type operating member instead of a button). There may be. Furthermore, the performance images are displayed in a manner that corresponds to the jackpot expectation level suggested by the type of button image 500 displayed at each stage of performance.

When the button image 500 is promoted to a higher rank mode, a preview effect of stepping up may be displayed. In this case, the preview effect may be, for example, a cut-in preview effect in which a specific special object appears on the screen, or a comment preview effect in which one of several types of lines is displayed on the screen in the form of a character string. There may be. When the rank of the button image 500 is promoted to a higher rank, the number of operations required is greater, so the cumulative operation amount and time until the final effect is displayed after going through a plurality of stages may become redundant. Therefore, in order to reduce the redundancy by making small presentations, some kind of preview performance may be issued each time the performance stage progresses, and the type of preview performance that occurs at each performance stage may be changed. For example, in the first presentation stage, a normal white button is displayed as the button image 500, and a comment preview presentation is displayed. At the second presentation stage, a blue button image 500 is displayed as the button image 500, and a cut-in preview presentation is displayed. In the third performance stage, a red button image 500 is displayed as the button image 500, and a validity branch performance indicating the validity determination result is displayed.

As a modification, it may be determined that the higher the jackpot expectation for each type of button image 500, the different the operation mode rather than the operation amount. In this case, the difficulty, complexity, and complexity of the operation mode may be increased as the type of game has a higher jackpot expectation. For example, in the first performance stage, a first operation mode (for example, single press) is requested as the operation input condition, and a scene of a normal attack against an enemy character is displayed as the performance content. In the second performance stage, a second operation mode (for example, consecutive hits) is requested as an operation input condition, and a scene of multiple attacks in the form of a pursuit attack on an enemy character is displayed as the performance content. In the third production stage, a third operation mode (for example, long press) is requested as an operation input condition, and the production content is to accumulate energy to perform the final special move when the enemy character is about to be defeated. A scene requesting a long press may be displayed. In this way, by requesting different operation modes such as the first operation mode, second operation mode, and third operation mode at each of the first to third performance stages, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming monotonous.

FIG. 31 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation. FIG. 31(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image 500. FIG. 31(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of presentation periods constituting the button presentation. FIG. 31(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 31(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 31(e) shows the timing and length of the effective period of the effect button 109. FIG. 31(f) shows an example of operation of the effect button 109 and its operation mode.

In the button effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 31(b), after the advance notice effect suggesting reach is executed during the period of "pre-reach notice" in S900 and reach is established, the "introduction effect" is executed. The period is set (S901). In the "introductory performance", a performance is performed that informs the player that if the player operates a button in the button performance that is about to start, the rank of the button image and performance will be promoted and the expectation of a jackpot will increase. In "Step 1" (S902), the performance of the first stage is executed, and in that performance, a first validity period (S911) of the performance button 109 is provided, and until the first validity period (S911), the performance is The button 109 is in an invalid period (S910).

In the first validity period (S911), a character string "Press the button once!" that requests one press as an operation mode and a white button image 500 are displayed (S930), and the lamp of the production button 109 is displayed. is lit in white (S920). The lighting of the lamp of the performance button 109 indicates that the validity period has expired, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "1 second left" is displayed as the remaining time of the validity period, and in the second related display area 504, "1 more time" is displayed as the operation mode. When the player presses the performance button 109 once during the first validity period (S911) and the operation input condition is satisfied (S940), the remaining number of times in the second related display area 504 changes to "0 times" and the valid At the end of the period, "0 seconds" is displayed in the first related display area 502, and the lamp of the production button 109 emits light like a flash (S921). After “Step 1”, a branching effect is executed to determine whether the continuation of the effect succeeds or fails to progress to the next stage of effect (S903), and if there is an operation input that satisfies the operation input condition in S940, “Not yet! ” is displayed to indicate the continuation of the performance, and the second performance stage “Step 2” is executed (S904). If the operation input conditions are not satisfied, other performances are performed instead of the second stage and subsequent stages. (not shown).

In "Step 2" (S904), the performance of the second stage of performance is executed, and in this performance, a second valid period of the performance button 109 (S913) is provided. Since the operation input conditions for the production button 109 in the second production stage are larger than the operation input conditions for the production button 109 in the first production stage, the second validity period (S913) is longer than the first validity period (S911). It is said that The period from after the first valid period (S911) to the second valid period (S913) is an invalid period (S912). In the second validity period (S913), the character string "Press the button 3 times!" and the blue button image 500 are displayed (S931), and the lamp of the production button 109 is displayed as an operation mode. is lit in blue (S922), and a sound effect indicating that the light emitting color of the button image 500 and the effect button 109 has evolved from white to blue is output (S950). The lighting of the lamp of the performance button 109 indicates that the validity period has expired, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "3 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time of the validity period, and in the second related display area 504, "3 times" is displayed as the operation mode. When the production button 109 is repeatedly pressed by the player during the second validity period (S913) (S941), the characters in the second related display area 504 will be displayed as "2 more times", "1 more time", and "0 more times" each time the player presses the production button 109 (S941). ” is displayed so that the number of remaining times decreases. In the first related display area 502, as the validity period passes, a decrease in remaining time (countdown) is displayed, such as "2 seconds left" and "1 second left", and as the validity period ends, "0 seconds" is displayed. . When the performance button 109 is pressed three times within the validity period and the operation input condition is satisfied, the lamp of the performance button 109 emits light like a flash (S923). After “Step 2”, a branching effect is executed to determine whether the continuation of the effect succeeds or fails, which progresses to the next effect stage (S905), and if there is an operation input that satisfies the operation input condition in S941, “The process continues”. A character string indicating continuation of the effect such as "!" is displayed, and the effect of "Step 3" which is the third effect stage is executed (S906). If the operation input conditions are not satisfied, the performance from the third stage onwards is replaced with another performance (not shown).

In "Step 3" (S906), the performance of the third stage is executed, and in that performance, a third validity period (S917) of the performance button 109 is provided, but it is not indicated on the screen before the third validity period. A short hidden validity period (S915) is provided as a trick or hidden function. During the hidden validity period (S915), the button image 500 is not displayed on the screen, but the lamp of the production button 109 secretly lights up in white (S924), and when the player presses the production button 109, the operation becomes valid. It is a period. The lighting of the lamp of the production button 109 indicates that the period is valid. If the player presses the performance button 109 during the hidden validity period (S915), a performance lottery will be executed with a probability according to the result of the success/failure determination, and the performance will be displayed if the performance execution pattern that suggests the expected level of jackpot is won. For example, in the case of a jackpot, an effect with a higher probability of jackpot expectation may be executed. Productions with high expectations for jackpots include, for example, cut-in preview productions in which a specific special object appears on the screen, production buttons 109 that emit light while changing in multiple colors such as rainbow colors, and special effects. This includes performances that output sound. The hidden validity period (S915) is provided at a timing that does not overlap with the first to third validity periods, thereby avoiding complication of production control. The period from after the second validity period (S913) to before the hidden validity period (S915) is an invalid period (S914). Note that the execution pattern of the hidden button may be determined not only when the button is pressed, but also at the time of starting the fluctuation, etc., by lottery.

Since the operation input condition for the production button 109 in the third production stage is larger than the operation input condition for the production button 109 in the second production stage, the third validity period (S917) is longer than the second validity period (S913). It is said that The period from after the hidden validity period (S915) to before the third validity period (S917) is an invalid period (S916). In the third validity period (S917), the character string "Press the button 10 times!" and a red button image 500 are displayed to request 10 consecutive presses as an operation mode, and a countdown display of the remaining time of the validity period begins. At the same time (S932), the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in red (S925), and a sound effect indicating that the light emitting color of the button image 500 and the production button 109 has evolved from blue to red is output (S951). The lighting of the lamp of the performance button 109 indicates that the validity period has expired, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. In the first related display area 502 of the button image 500, "5 more seconds" is displayed as the remaining time of the validity period, and in the second related display area 504, "10 more times" is displayed as the operation mode. When the player repeatedly presses the performance button 109 during the third validity period (S917) (S942), the characters in the second related display area 504 will be displayed as ``9 more times'', ``8 more times'', and ``7 more times'' each time the button is pressed. ” The remaining number of times remaining will be displayed as if it were decreasing. In the first related display area 502, as the validity period elapses, a decrease (countdown) of the remaining time is displayed, such as "2 seconds left" and "1 second left", and as the validity period ends, "0 seconds" is displayed. . When the effect button 109 is repeatedly pressed 10 times within the validity period and the operation input condition is satisfied, the lamp of the effect button 109 emits light while changing in multiple colors like a rainbow (S926). After "Step 3", a branch effect is executed to determine whether the result of the judgment is a jackpot or a miss (S907), and a jackpot or a miss is displayed. During the branch performance (S907), the performance button 109 is in an invalid period (S918).

If no operation input is made by the player during the valid period of operation on the performance button 109 at a predetermined performance stage, the next performance stage does not proceed. In that case, the execution of the button performance after the next stage of performance is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative performance. In the alternative performance, the button image 500 is not displayed, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button performance consists of a battle performance, a step-up preview performance (for example, a cut-in preview performance, etc.) is executed in which the player's operation of the performance button 109 gives an ally character an advantage as the stage of the performance progresses. On the other hand, if the performance button 109 is not operated, a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character remain in a conflict with no winner or loser is displayed as an alternative performance, and the button image 500 and step-up preview performance are displayed as is. The final result is reached without being affected. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, it may be possible to switch to an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

Although there is an operation input by the player during the valid period of the effect button 109, if the operation input does not satisfy the operation input conditions, the button effect will continue, but the type of the button image 500 will be the type of the higher rank. The button image 500 of the same type is replaced with an effect in which the button image 500 of the same type is displayed without being promoted and without displaying the step-up notice effect. The case where the operation input condition is not satisfied is, for example, a case where the player is required to input the operation 10 times within 5 seconds and only 1 to 9 inputs are made within the valid period. As a modified example, if the operation input does not satisfy the operation input conditions, the button performances from the next stage onwards may be omitted and replaced with an alternative performance, as in the case where there is no operation input.

In addition, in the example of this figure, the branching effect of each step (each effect of S903, S905, S907, each button lamp effect such as S921, S923, S926) is set to the operation input condition when the validity period has elapsed (at the end). However, if the operation input condition is satisfied during the valid period, the branch effect may be started immediately. In this case, the start time of the branch effect will be shifted forward, but it is preferable to continue displaying the branch effect result notification screen for a long time to match the effect timing from step 2 onwards (step (This is because the larger the number of special effect patterns won, the greater the difference between the variable display time of the special symbol and the execution time of the effect if the execution time of the branch effect shifts to the front with multiple button effects.) .

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a table showing a plurality of types of effect patterns in which combinations of types of button images to be displayed in button effects are determined. In this figure, six types of performance patterns are illustrated, and pattern IDs from "1" to "6" are assigned.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "1", the white button image 500 of the first rank is displayed in the first production stage, but the production does not develop after the second production stage, and the button image 500 is not promoted or It is decided that the match will end with a miss without any indication. The effect pattern with pattern ID "1" is selected in accordance with the variable pattern that is the length of the variable time in which the effect ends while remaining in the first effect stage.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "2", the white button image 500, which is the first rank, is displayed in the first production stage, and is promoted to the blue button image 500, which is the second rank, in the second production stage. It is determined that the performance does not develop in the third performance stage and ends without the button image 500 being promoted or displayed.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "3", the blue button image 500 of the second rank is displayed from the first production stage, and the same blue button image 500 of the second rank is displayed in the second production stage as well. It is determined that the performance does not develop in the third performance stage and ends without the button image 500 being promoted or displayed. The effect patterns with pattern IDs "2" and "3" are selected in accordance with the variable pattern that is the length of the variable time in which the effect ends while remaining in the second effect stage.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "4", the white button image 500 of the first rank is displayed in the first production stage, and promoted to the blue button image 500 of the second rank in the second production stage, and At the presentation stage, it is determined that the button image will be promoted to the third rank, red button image 500.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "5", the blue button image 500 of the second rank is displayed from the first production stage, the same blue button image 500 of the second rank is displayed in the second production stage, and the blue button image 500 of the second rank is displayed in the second production stage. In the third performance stage, it is determined that the button image is promoted to the third rank, red button image 500.

In the production pattern with pattern ID "6", the white button image 500, which is the first rank, is displayed in the first production stage, and is promoted to the blue button image 500, which is the second rank, in the second production stage. At the presentation stage, special promotion to the third rank, red button image 500, is determined. Special promotion means that after the button image 500 appears to end without being promoted from the second presentation stage, it rewinds the presentation of the second presentation stage, for example, displays a presentation that plays in reverse at high speed, and then restarts it again. This is a performance in which the button image 500 is promoted to the red button image 500 of the third rank or the lever-type operating member button image 500 of the fourth rank at the third stage of sequential playback. The performance patterns with pattern IDs "4" to "6" are selected in accordance with the variation pattern having the length of the variation time that can be extended to the third production stage.

Note that after determining one of the plurality of types of performance patterns, the performance determining means 303 determines each operation input condition from the first performance stage to the third performance stage according to the pattern ID of the performance pattern. In addition, when pattern IDs "2" to "6" are selected, if the production button 109 is not operated in the first production stage, the production pattern can be replaced with the production pattern of pattern ID "1", and from the second production stage onwards. The button effect may be prevented from being executed. Similarly, when pattern IDs "4" to "6" are selected and the production button 109 is not operated in the second production stage, the production pattern can be replaced with the production pattern with pattern ID "2" or "3". The button presentation at the third presentation stage may not be executed. As a modification, a performance pattern that ends up to the first performance stage, a performance pattern that ends up to the second performance stage, and a performance pattern that develops up to the third performance stage may all be determined as a common performance pattern. In that case, regardless of the length of the variation time of the variation pattern, select one of pattern IDs "4" to "6" and if you want to finish up to the first production stage, refer to the first production stage. If the process ends up to the second performance stage, the remaining part may be omitted by referring to the second performance stage.

As a modified example, in a stage where a large number of operations is required as a normal operation input condition, such as the third production stage (the final stage in the example shown in this figure), the second related display area 504 may display a message such as "10 more times". Rather than clearly indicating the number, the number of hits may be intentionally made unclear by using ambiguous words such as "Consecutive hits!". In this case, based on the assumption that one operation was requested in the first performance stage and three operations were required in the second performance stage, four or more operations were required in the third performance stage. Special operation input conditions, such as allowing the player to imagine that there is a jackpot, but actually confirming a jackpot with a single operation, make it possible to produce unexpected performances.

As a modified example, when a plurality of button effects are executed simultaneously in a plurality of effect display areas instead of one effect display area of the effect display device 60, the button effects of this embodiment are executed in parallel in each area. may be displayed and run simultaneously. The plurality of effect display areas referred to here may be, for example, a plurality of effect display devices such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, or the display area of one effect display device 60 may be divided to display a plurality of effects. It is also possible to provide a region. In these cases, the button images 500 are displayed in each of the plurality of effect display areas, the operation mode and the validity period are displayed as operation input conditions, and the plurality of button images 500 are displayed by one operation of the effect button 109 by the player. An effect that promotes the type of button image or a step-up notice effect may be displayed in parallel for all of the above. However, in the case of displaying in two effect display areas, if the operation of the effect button 109 in one effect display area satisfies the operation input condition and the type of button image 500 is promoted, then the button The valid period of the performance button 109 may be temporarily stopped in the other performance display area in order to draw the player's attention to the performance displayed in response to the operation and to avoid duplicate control of the performance. That is, this is a process in which the valid period of the effect button 109 is temporarily switched to an invalid period, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the valid period is returned to the valid period again, and the display of the number of subsequent operations is continued.

As a modified example, if a button image 500 of a type with a high expectation of jackpot (for example, a type with a second rank or higher) is displayed from the first performance stage, this indicates that the development to the second performance stage or later is confirmed. May be expressed. In this case, the button image 500 may indicate that the operation of the performance button 109 in the first performance stage will promote the button image 500 to a rank (third rank or higher) with a higher expectation of a jackpot. In addition, a button image 500 one rank lower than the highest rank is displayed from the first presentation stage, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, a button image 500 that is promoted to the highest rank button image 500 may be executed at the third presentation stage. There may be.

In addition, as another modification, an effect suggesting a setting value may be performed using the second related display area 504 (displaying the number of operations). For example, in the case of an operation pattern in which there are 10 or more operations remaining, in the period from "6 operations remaining" to "4 operations remaining", the production button 109 is operated twice for each decrease in the number of remaining operations, that is, the production By configuring the button 109 to reduce the number of remaining operations by 1 every time the button 109 is operated twice (thereby making the operational period of 10 times into an actual operation period of 13 times), the set value becomes "4". ” may indicate a high setting of “6”. Alternatively, it is possible to suggest the setting value by configuring it to change the font color and font of the number remaining (for example, displaying gold letters) when a specific number of times is reached, such as "6 times remaining." may be configured.

<Second example>
The present embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first embodiment, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special effect pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. While prompting the player to input an operation, a performance is executed in which the display mode of the button image changes in accordance with the operation of the performance button 109. As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot expectation level is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The special effect pattern in this embodiment is divided into a first special effect pattern and a second special effect pattern, and in both special effect patterns, a type of button image with relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed first. From this, it is determined that the continuation of the performance will be executed in response to the operation by the player. In the first special performance pattern, after a button image of a type with relatively low expectation of jackpot is displayed, a normal preview performance is executed when a button operation is performed within the validity period of the performance button 109. In the second special production pattern, after a button image of a type with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot is displayed, if a button operation is performed within the validity period of the production button 109, a type with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot is displayed. Displays the promotion of the button image to a button image, and then retreats the promoted button image to the edge or corner of the screen. The evacuated button image is used in a later performance, and has the role of foretelling that a performance with high expectations for a jackpot will be executed in a later performance.

The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns when a variable time variation pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the first special performance pattern is selected as the special performance pattern, the performance determining means 303 selects the type of button image to be displayed in the button performance from among multiple types, and selects the content of the normal preview performance from among the multiple types. . When the second special performance pattern is selected as the special performance pattern, the performance determining means 303 selects from a plurality of types the type of first button image to be displayed first in the button performance, and displays the first button image after the rank of the button image is promoted. The type of second button image is selected from a plurality of types. Further, the performance content to be displayed in the performance based on the second special performance pattern is selected from a plurality of types of content. The effect display control means 305 executes an effect based on the first special effect pattern when the first special effect pattern is selected. The effect display control means 305 executes an effect based on the second special effect pattern when the second special effect pattern is selected.

FIG. 33 schematically shows an example of screen transition of the first button effect in the second embodiment. In the performance based on the first special performance pattern, a button image 500 and a character string urging the player to operate the performance button 109 such as "Press the button!" are displayed as in the first screen 510. After that, if the performance button 109 is pressed within the validity period of the performance button 109, a comment preview 515 with a character string of dialogue such as "Go into darkness..." is displayed as a normal preview performance as shown in the second screen 511. let The comment preview performance is a preview performance that indicates high expectations for a jackpot by displaying one of a plurality of types of lines in the form of a character string on the screen.

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the validity period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 510, the comment preview 515 is not displayed as in the third screen 512, and the development of the effect is not displayed. In this case, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect may be displayed in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character becomes competitive and cannot be resolved.

FIG. 34 schematically shows an example of screen transition of the second button effect in the second embodiment. In the performance based on the second special performance pattern, as in the first screen 520, a first button image 530 and a character string such as "Press the button!" that prompts the player to operate the performance button 109 are displayed. After that, if the production button 109 is pressed within the validity period of the production button 109, a comment preview 516 having the same appearance as the comment preview 515 in FIG. The comment preview 516 is erased by pretending to be a performance based on a special performance pattern. Then, as shown in the third screen 522, a second button image 531 having a different color from the first button image 530 is displayed, and a promotion effect is executed in which a promotion mark 535 with a character string such as "Button promotion!" is displayed. . The promotion performance is a performance in which the type of the first button image 530 being displayed is switched to a second button image 531 of a higher rank type, and suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is further increased. That is, by first displaying a first button image 530 that is the same as the button image 500 of the first special effect pattern and a comment preview 516 that is the same as the comment preview 515, the player is made to think that a normal effect is being displayed. However, by further displaying a presentation different from the normal presentation, it is possible to express that the expectation level of a jackpot has increased. The configuration is such that it cannot be determined which of the first special performance pattern and the second special performance pattern is displayed only by the types of the first button image 500 and first button image 530 displayed. Similarly, the configuration is such that it cannot be determined whether the first special performance pattern or the second special performance pattern is being displayed based only on the types of comment preview 515 and comment preview 516. Note that although the comment preview 516 in this figure exemplifies the same lines as the comment preview 515 in FIG. 33, a different line may be selected and displayed. Note that the second button image 531 of the "higher rank" type is used as an image display indicating that the operation input of the operating means is within the valid period during the valid period when the subsequent button effect is executed. . Furthermore, this image suggests that when the conditions for switching effects are met, such as when an operation input is made in a later button effect, a preview effect display with relatively high jackpot expectation will be executed. Furthermore, the second button image 531 may be the same as the first button image 530, or may have a configuration in which a character image or a character string display is additionally added to give the player a sense of anticipation for a jackpot. .

After the third screen 522, on the fourth screen 523, the second button image 531 is displayed as a third button image 532 whose size is reduced and moved to the edge of the screen. The third button image 532 moved to the edge of the screen remains at that position until the subsequent performance. By placing the third button image 532 in the corner of the screen in this way, it is possible to suggest that the chance will be carried over to the subsequent performance, and that the performance with high expectations for a jackpot will continue. The left third button image 532 may be used in a subsequent performance within the same symbol variation, or may be used in a subsequent performance within the next symbol variation. In the subsequent presentation, a promotion presentation may be performed in which the type of the first button image 530 is promoted in the same manner as the third screen 522, and the promotion presentation may be accumulated at the edge of the screen similarly to the third button image 532, or the subsequent presentation may be performed. The rank of the third button image 532 is further promoted each time it is executed, or an image of the same type as a preview that generates a button image based on the occurrence of a highly anticipated preview (red cut-in) in a subsequent production. (red button image).

Note that in the performance based on the second special performance pattern of this embodiment, when the performance button 109 is operated on the first screen 520, the normal preview performance is displayed for a moment on the second screen 521, or the normal preview performance is It is designed to perform a promotion effect while displaying. In the performance based on the second special performance pattern in the modified example, when the performance button 109 is operated on the first screen 520, the normal preview performance is not displayed on the second screen 521, and the promoted performance is displayed on the second screen 521 and thereafter. It may also be a specification to execute. Alternatively, the promotion effect may be executed with an appearance resembling a normal preview effect. For example, a promotion effect may be displayed with an appearance similar to a comment preview, and when the player presses the effect button 109, the promotion effect is displayed. The specifications may be such that

On the other hand, if the performance button 109 is not operated within the validity period of the performance button 109 on the first screen 520, neither the comment preview 515 nor the promotion performance will be displayed as shown in the fourth screen 523, and the development of the performance will not be displayed either. . In this case, as an alternative performance, for example, in the case of a battle performance, a performance process in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is evenly contested and cannot be resolved may be displayed.

When the performance based on the second special performance pattern is executed, the performance based on the second special performance pattern may be continuously performed in the subsequent variable performance. For example, when the player operates the performance button 109, a performance based on the next second special performance pattern is executed with the third button image 532 retracted to the edge of the screen along with the promotion performance, and the player In response to the operation of the production button 109, the third button image 532 is accumulated (stocked) at the edge of the screen, or the accumulated third button image 532 is converted to an image of a higher rank (accumulated button image promotion). For example, if the pre-judgment result corresponding to a symbol change with high expectation of jackpot is included in the reserved memory, or if the total of the reserved memory of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit of 8 pieces, , the performance based on the second special performance pattern is continuously repeated in a plurality of symbol variation performances up to the symbol variation corresponding to the win/fail lottery value corresponding to the jackpot.

On the other hand, only when the player operates the performance button 109 in the performance based on the second special performance pattern, the performance based on the second special performance pattern will be executed continuously in the subsequent performance, or the performance based on the second special performance pattern will be accumulated. Alternatively, an effect using the third button image 532 may be executed. For example, just before the start of the subsequent performance, the subsequent performance is determined by referring to a different performance pattern table depending on whether or not the player operated the performance button 109 in the preceding performance. Even though button images were not accumulated in the preceding production, if a production that assumes the accumulation of button images or a production with relatively high expectations for a jackpot is executed in a subsequent production, the presence or absence of accumulation of button images will be determined. This is because the expected level of jackpot of the subsequent performance will not match, and the correspondence between the content of the performance and the expected level of jackpot may collapse. If the player operates the performance button 109 in the preceding performance and the third button image 532 is accumulated, as a subsequent performance, for example, if it is a symbol variation performance that corresponds to a jackpot, the accumulated third button image 532 An image 532 is used to select a performance that stimulates the presence or absence of a jackpot, and if it is a symbol variation performance that does not correspond to a jackpot, a button performance that can accumulate a third button image 532 is further selected.

In this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a performance is determined by referring to different performance pattern tables depending on whether or not the performance button 109 is operated or whether a button image is accumulated in the preceding performance. In the modified example, the following combinations (1) to (5) are determined in advance, regardless of whether or not the production button 109 is operated or whether a button image is accumulated in the preceding production, and when the production button 109 is operated. However, it may be possible to perform the performance even when no operation is performed. In other words, when determining the first special performance pattern or the second special performance pattern, the performance contents when the performance button 109 is operated and the performance contents when the performance button 109 is not operated are determined in advance. Good too. In that case, the content of the decision is, for example, (1) whether to promote the rank of the button image (i.e., whether to use a comment preview or a promotion effect), and (2) display the normal preview content (for example, a comment preview). Contents, (3) Rank when promoting the rank of the button image, that is, the type of button image to be displayed after promotion, (4) Display in a later button effect when the player presses the effect button 109 within the valid period The combination of (5) the contents of the promotion performance to be displayed at the time of promotion and (5) the content of the performance at the time of non-promotion to be displayed in a subsequent button performance if the player does not press the performance button 109 within the valid period is determined at once. You may. Based on this determined content, the effect determining means 303 selects and executes the effect depending on whether or not the effect button 109 is actually operated.

As mentioned above, the promotion effect is when the pre-judgment result corresponding to a symbol change with high expectation of jackpot is included in the reserved memory, or when the total of the reserved memory of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is the upper limit of 8 , it may be configured to be executed in a variation presentation up to a symbol variation corresponding to a jackpot. For example, if a button performance that can be replaced with a promotion performance is determined in at least one of the one or more variation performances that are executed before a symbol variation with a high expectation of jackpot, then the promotion performance in that variation performance is determined. may also be executed. In addition, if a button effect that can be replaced with a promotion effect is not determined, the promotion effect may be forcibly replaced with the variation effect immediately before the symbol change with high expectation of a jackpot, or the promotion effect may be forcibly replaced with the variation effect immediately before the symbol change with high expectation of a jackpot. Adjustments may also be made so that a promotion effect is executed inside. However, if the promotion effect cannot be executed even in symbol variations with high expectations for jackpot, the promotion effect may not be executed. In addition, during the period in which a special variation pattern is selected (special variation pattern table reference period) when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of variations starting from the execution of the special game, promotions across multiple variations are possible. It may also be configured to execute a variation performance pattern in which the performance is executed once or multiple times, and a button performance using the accumulated third button image 532 is performed in a loss fluctuation after the relevant period or a jackpot fluctuation during the relevant period. . The period in which the special fluctuation pattern is selected is not one special fluctuation pattern table reference period, but is made up of multiple special fluctuation pattern table reference periods, and multiple periods with different probabilities of promotion effects being selected are consecutive. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 35 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation of the second embodiment. FIG. 35(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 35(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of presentation periods constituting the button presentation. FIG. 35(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 35(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 35(e) shows the timing and length of the effective period of the effect button 109. FIG. 35(f) shows the operation timing of the effect button 109.

In the button performance exemplified in this figure, as shown in FIG. 35(b), there is a preview performance that suggests a reach occurrence during the period of "pre-reach notice" in S960, and during that period, the first button performance "button "Production 1" (S961) is executed, and after "Pre-reach notice" (S960), "Button production 2" (S963), which is the second button production, is executed, and then "Reach production" (S965) is executed. be done. After the "reach effect" (S965), the third button effect, "button effect 3" (S966), is executed, and a win/fail branch (S967) is executed.

In "Button Performance 1" (S961), after the character string "Press Button!" requesting pressing of the performance button 109 is displayed, the first validity period of the performance button 109 (S971) is provided. The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S970) until it reaches the first valid period (S971). During the first validity period, the white first button image 530 is displayed (S990), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in white (S980). The lighting of the lamp of the performance button 109 indicates that the performance button 109 is valid, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. When the player presses the production button 109 during the first validity period (S971) (S1000), a sound effect is output (S1010), and the white first button image 530 changes to the blue second button image 531. The second button image 531 is "promoted" (S962), and the second button image 531 is reduced and saved and stocked at the edge of the screen as the third button image 532 (S991).

In "Button Effect 2" (S963), after the character string "Press Button!" requesting pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, a second validity period of the effect button 109 (S973) is provided. The period from after the first valid period (S971) to the second valid period (S973) is an invalid period (S972). Immediately before the second valid period (S973), a period is provided for blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 (S981), and a sound effect is output during this period (S1011). The blinking lamp of the performance button 109 and the sound effect inform the player that the operation input of the performance button 109 will become effective immediately after that (second valid period, S973). During the second validity period (S973), the blue button image stocked at the edge of the screen in S991 is enlarged and displayed (S992), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in blue (S982). When the player presses the production button 109 during the second validity period (S973) (S1001), a sound effect is output (S1012), and the blue button image is "promoted" to a red button image (S964). Then, the red button image is reduced in size, saved, and stocked at the edge of the screen (S993). After "promotion" (S964), "reach effect" is executed (S965).

In "Button Effect 3" (S966), after the character string "Press Button!" requesting pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, a third validity period of the effect button 109 (S975) is provided. The period from after the second validity period (S973) to the third validity period (S975) is an invalid period (S974). Immediately before the third valid period (S975), there is also a period in which the lamp of the effect button 109 blinks (S983), and a sound effect is output during this period (S1013). The blinking lamp of the effect button 109 and the sound effect inform the player that the operation input of the effect button 109 will become effective immediately after that (third valid period, S975). During the third validity period (S975), the red button image stocked at the edge of the screen in S993 is enlarged and displayed (S994), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in red (S984). When the player presses the performance button 109 during the third validity period (S975) (S1002), a sound effect is output (S1014), and a performance that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a loss is displayed as a win/fail branch performance. It is executed (S967). During the win/fail branch performance, the performance button 109 is inactive (S976).

If no operation input is made by the player during the first validity period (S971) and the second validity period (S973), promotion or stock of the button image will not be displayed. In that case, the execution of the subsequent button effects is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. In the alternative performance, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button effect consists of a battle effect, if the effect button 109 is not operated, an effect in which the friendly character and the enemy character are in an even fight with no winner or loser is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as is. Otherwise, the final judgment performance is reached without the button performance being displayed. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, it may be possible to switch to an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

Note that in the example of FIG. 35, in "Button Effect 2" and "Button Effect 3", effects are executed using button images that have been stocked up to that point, but in a modified example, button images are used in these series of effects. It may also be configured such that a performance that does not use . When a performance that does not use a button image is inserted in between in this way, the player may mistakenly think that the promotion did not occur and the same button image was displayed even though the player pressed the performance button 109 and aimed to promote the button image. There is a possibility that you will. Therefore, just before using the stocked button image in the performance, the lamp of the performance button 109 is blinked in S981 and S983, and a sound effect is output in S1011 and S1013 to emphasize the use of the button image in the performance. ing.

As a modified example, the button images stocked in S991 and S993 are changed so that they cycle through multiple colors such as white, blue, and red, so that it is difficult for the player to identify which color they were stocked in. It may be displayed at the edge of the screen, or only the outer shape or outline of the button without coloring, such as a silhouette, may be displayed at the edge of the screen.

As another modification, the player may be required not only to press the performance button 109 once, but also to ``repeat press'' in which the button is pressed multiple times in succession, or ``long press'' in which the button is held down for a certain period of time. .

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the button image is "evacuated" and displayed when a button is operated in the button presentation, but as another modification, the position of the button image is not changed, and the button image is You can make the button standby in a promoted state (or maintain an equivalent button image), add the words "LOCK" or "HOLD" and display it, or fix the button image with a "chain" image. Alternatively, the button image may be displayed in a fixed manner so that the button image waits until the timing of the subsequent button effect.

<Third Example>
The present embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the underlying technology, the first embodiment, and the second embodiment, and the explanation of common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special effect pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. While prompting the player to input an operation, a performance is executed in which the display mode of the button image changes in accordance with the operation of the performance button 109. As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the expected jackpot is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The special effect pattern in this embodiment is a third special effect pattern that is positioned as a modification of the first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern in the second embodiment. That is, when a normal operation, for example, a single press, is performed on the performance button 109 that prompts an operation input in the button performance, the first special performance pattern or the second special performance pattern of the second embodiment is executed. Comment previews and promotion effects will be performed. On the other hand, if a specific type of button image with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot is displayed and you perform an unusual operation, for example, keep pressing it for a long time, the button image will be shrunk and moved to the edge of the screen and stored. When you stop holding down and release the stock in a subsequent performance, the stocked button image with high expectations can be used in the subsequent performance. In this manner, in this embodiment, when a button image with a predetermined jackpot expectation level is displayed, the player can arbitrarily stock the button image for a subsequent performance. For example, when a button image with a high expectation level appears, the player does not use the expectation level of the button image at that moment, but retains it until the final win/fail branch performance, and then uses the button image's expectation level at that timing to can be used. That is, a player who thinks that it is more desirable to use a highly anticipated button image after the reach is reached than before the reach is achieved may stock up on the button images and use them later.

The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns when a variable time variation pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the third special performance pattern is selected as the special performance pattern, the performance determining means 303 selects the type of button image to be displayed first in the button performance from a plurality of types, and also selects the type of button image to be displayed first in the button performance, and selects the type of button image to be displayed first in the button performance, and also selects the type of button image to be displayed first in the button performance, and The content to be displayed is selected from a plurality of types of content. The effect display control means 305 executes an effect based on the third special effect pattern when the third special effect pattern is selected.

FIG. 36 schematically shows an example of screen transition of button effects in the third embodiment. In the performance based on the third special performance pattern, a first button image 550 and a character string urging the player to operate the performance button 109 such as "Press the button!" are displayed as on the first screen 540. After that, if the production button 109 is pressed once within the validity period of the production button 109, a comment preview 517 with a string of lines such as "Go into darkness..." as a normal preview production as shown in the second screen 541. Display. The comment preview performance is a preview performance that indicates high expectations for a jackpot by displaying one of a plurality of types of lines in the form of a character string on the screen.

On the other hand, if the performance button 109 is not operated within the validity period of the performance button 109 on the first screen 540, the comment preview 517 is not displayed as in the sixth screen 545, and the development of the performance is not displayed. In this case, as an alternative effect, for example, in the case of a battle effect, an effect may be displayed in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character becomes competitive and cannot be resolved.

If the first button image 550 displayed on the first screen 540 is of a type with a relatively high expectation of jackpot, for example, a red button image, and the production button 109 is held down within the validity period, As shown in the third screen 542, the first button image 550 is reduced and stored in the form of a red second button image 551 that is saved to the edge of the screen. At this time, a character string 549 indicating that it is possible to stock the button image is displayed on the screen before the start of the validity period. The purpose of this is to display the character string 549 early so that even if the player starts long pressing after reading the character string 549, the validity period is not long at all. Furthermore, before displaying the character string 549, an effect display that is a precursor to the character string 549 is displayed on the screen, suggesting that the character string 549 will be displayed from now on and that button images can be stocked. Good too. The stock of the second button image 551 is kept at the edge of the screen while the production button 109 is held down. By placing the second button image 551 with a high expectation of a jackpot in the corner of the screen in this way, it is possible to suggest that the chance will be carried over to the subsequent performance, and the performance with a high expectation of a jackpot will continue. Also, it is clearly shown in the appearance that the subsequent performance is switched depending on whether the button image is stocked at the player's discretion (third screen 542) or not (second screen 541).

As shown in the fourth screen 543, when the player releases the long press on the performance button 109 when, for example, a white third button image 552 with a relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed in the subsequent button performance, the second button image 552 is displayed. As shown in the 5th screen 544, the red second button image 551 is enlarged, replaced with the third button image 552, and displayed as the fourth button image 553. Here, by pressing the performance button 109 of a color with relatively high expectations, the player can increase his or her expectation that a jackpot will occur in a subsequent performance, for example, a win/fail performance. For example, when a battle effect is displayed on the fourth screen 543, a scene in which an ally character wins against an enemy character is displayed, while if the button image is not stocked, a different effect is used to produce a jackpot. You may.

FIG. 37 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation of the third embodiment. FIG. 37(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 37(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of presentation periods constituting the button presentation. FIG. 37(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 37(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 37(e) shows the timing and length of the effective period of the effect button 109. FIG. 37(f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the button performance exemplified in this figure, as shown in FIG. 37(b), in the period of "pre-reach notice" in S1020, there is a preview performance that suggests the occurrence of a reach, and during that period, the first button performance "button Performance 1" (S1021) is executed, and after "Pre-reach preview" (S1020), the second button performance "Button performance 2" (S1023) is executed, and then "Reach performance" (S1025) is executed. be done. After the "reach effect" (S1025), the third button effect, "button effect 3" (S1026), is executed, and a win/fail branch (S1027) is executed.

In "Button Performance 1" (S1021), after the character string "Press Button!" requesting pressing of the performance button 109 is displayed, a first validity period of the performance button 109 (S1031) is provided. The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1030) until it reaches the first valid period (S1031). During the first validity period, a white button image is displayed (S1050), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in white (S1040). The lighting of the lamp of the performance button 109 indicates that the performance button 109 is valid, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. When the player presses the performance button 109 once during the first validity period (S1031) (S1060), a sound effect is output (S1070) and a comment preview is displayed (S1022).

In "Button Performance 2" (S1023), after the character string "Press Button!" requesting pressing of the performance button 109 is displayed, a second validity period of the performance button 109 (S1033) is provided. The period from after the first validity period (S1031) to the second validity period (S1033) is an invalid period (S1032). During the second validity period (S1033), a red button image is displayed (S1051), and the lamp of the production button 109 flashes in red (S1041). Here, the lamp of the effect button 109 is "flashing" instead of the usual "lighting", indicating that the effect button 109 can be pressed not only once but also for a long time. When the player presses the performance button 109 single-shot during the second validity period (S1033) (S1061), the lamp of the performance button 109 emits light like a flash (S1042), and a sound effect is output ( S1071), a comment preview is displayed (S1024). On the other hand, when the player presses and holds the performance button 109 during the second validity period (S1033), a sound effect is output (S1071), the red button image is shrunk and evacuated, and the game As long as the user continues to press and hold the production button 109, the images will continue to be stocked at the edge of the screen (S1052). Thereafter, a "reach effect" is executed (S1025), and if the player stops pressing and holding the effect button 109 during that time, the stocked red button image disappears.

In "Button Effect 3" (S1026), after a white button image is displayed (S1053) along with a character string "Press the button!" requesting the press of the effect button 109, the third validity period of the effect button 109 is displayed. (S1035) is provided. The third validity period is the last validity period before the win/fail branch performance, and even if it is possible to stock button images during this period, there is no opportunity to release the stock later and use it for subsequent performances. , the specification is that no stock will be accepted during the third validity period. The period from after the second validity period (S1033) to the third validity period (S1035) is an invalid period (S1034). Immediately before the third valid period (S1035), a period is provided for blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 (S1043), and a sound effect is output during this period (S1072). The blinking lamp of the production button 109 and the sound effect suggest that by releasing the long press of the production button 109, the displayed white button image can be replaced with a stock button image. Here, when the player releases the long press on the production button 109, during the third validity period (S1035), the red button image stocked at the edge of the screen is enlarged and replaced with the white button image (S1054), The lamp of the production button 109 is lit in red (S1044). When the player presses the performance button 109 single-shot during the third validity period (S1035), a sound effect is output (S1073), and a performance that incites whether it will be a jackpot or a miss as a win/fail branch performance. is executed (S1027). During the win/fail branch performance, the performance button 109 is inactive (S1036). In this way, a button image that has been stocked in any button effect can always be released from stock and used for the effect during the last valid period.

If no operation input is made by the player during the first validity period (S1031) and the second validity period (S1033), promotion and stock of the button image are not displayed. In that case, the execution of the subsequent button effects is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. In the alternative performance, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button effect consists of a battle effect, if the effect button 109 is not operated, an effect in which the friendly character and the enemy character are in an even fight with no winner or loser is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as is. Otherwise, the final judgment performance is reached without the button performance being displayed. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, it may be possible to switch to an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

In addition, in order to determine whether the mode of operation of the production button 109 by the player is a single press or a long press, the judgment is not made at the timing when a signal indicating operation on (pressing) of the production button 109 rises to high. , the determination is not made until a predetermined period of time, for example 0.2 seconds, has elapsed since the start. Then, if the signal indicating the operation on (pressing) of the production button 109 falls to low (or has fallen) between 0.2 seconds and 0.5 seconds after the rise, the falling timing ( If the operation is still on (pressed) even after 0.5 seconds, then at that timing (0.5 seconds after startup) It is determined that it is a "long press". However, in order to simplify the discrimination between the two, the instruction to stock button images may be made by pressing another operation means, for example, the cross key 110, instead of the production button 109. If configured in this way, the operation It becomes possible to determine whether or not an operation has been performed based on the rise of a signal indicating on (press).

In this way, if the production button 109 is held down while a specific type of button image with relatively high expectations is displayed, that button image is stocked at the edge of the screen. On the other hand, even if you press and hold the production button 109 when a button image other than a specific type, for example a button image of a type with relatively low expectations, is displayed, the button image is not stocked, but in the modified example, the button image Regardless of the type of button, it may be possible to stock button images by long pressing. Alternatively, if a button image other than a specific type is pressed for a long time while a button image other than a specific type is displayed, the reaction to the long press may be different from that of a normal single press, such as changing to a different color or using a different button than usual. Sound effects may also be output.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by stocking button images with relatively high jackpot expectations and using them in later button effects, it is possible to promote the button images displayed in later button effects to stock images. However, in the subsequent button performance, the first button image displayed may be a button image with a jackpot expectation equal to or higher than the stocked button images. By configuring in this way, for example, if the previous button performance is displayed in a manner with relatively low jackpot expectation among the stockable button images, the subsequent button performance will display a button image that is higher than the stockable button images. The configuration can be made so that the player does not have doubts that the button image may not be displayed. In addition, if a button image that is equal to or higher than the stock image is displayed in a later button production, it will be possible to further promote the button image in the later button production, or the jackpot confirmed pattern or the expectation level of a jackpot will be 80. It may be configured to have a regularity, such as setting the expectation degree to be high so that it is about %.

In this embodiment, an example was explained in which a single press is requested as the normal operation mode of the production button 109, but in a modified example, repeated presses or long presses are requested as the normal operation mode, and the button image is stocked. The specification may also be such that a different operation mode (for example, a single press) is required for the operation. Further, an operation mode different from the operation mode requested as a normal operation mode at the time of stocking button images may be requested as a normal operation mode after stocking is released. For example, a button image that requires a single press as a normal operating mode when the button is stocked may be designed to require repeated presses as an operating mode after the stock is released.

In this embodiment, it is suggested that stocking is possible by changing the lighting mode from the normal mode, such as by blinking the lamp of the effect button 109 during the period when button images can be stocked. In a modified example, in addition to the lighting mode of the production button 109, the possibility of stocking may be indicated by changing the display mode of the button image from the normal mode, such as by further blinking the button image.

In addition, in this embodiment, the release of the stock is explained as a long-press release operation, and the timing can be set arbitrarily by the player. However, as a modified example, the stock can be released according to a pattern determined in advance by a performance lottery. The timing of using the image may also be determined. Furthermore, in the modified example, the stocked button images cannot be used in the button image stock pattern determined by the production lottery of the third special production pattern, and the variation is terminated and the stock images are discarded. It may be configured to include a false pattern (in addition, if a false pattern is included, it is preferable to configure the button images in a stockable manner so that those with a certain expected level or higher do not have a false pattern). .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the button images are stored during the period in which the player presses and holds the button for a long time, it is assumed that the player cannot operate the performance button 109 during the button performance during the stock period. Therefore, the button performance while stocked may be configured to be replaced by the upper button of the cross key 110, or an auto button (automatic operation ) may be configured to enable execution of a button effect during operation of a stocked button effect.

<Fourth Example>
The present embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the base technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment, and will omit the explanation of the common points.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special effect pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the effect button 109 is displayed on the screen. While prompting the player to input an operation, a performance is executed in which the display mode of the button image changes in accordance with the operation of the performance button 109. As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot expectation level is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The button effect in this embodiment is such that when the player presses the effect button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is being displayed, the button image being displayed is divided into a plurality of button images, thereby multiplying, and the effect button It is an effect that repeats division or proliferation every time 109 is pressed. At this time, at least some of the proliferated button images may become types of button images with relatively high jackpot expectations, and by repeating the proliferation, button images with higher jackpot expectations may appear. There is sex. The plurality of button images that were displayed when the production button 109 was pressed last change to individual comment preview images. The higher the expectation of a jackpot, the button image changes to the comment preview image with a higher expectation of a jackpot, thereby suggesting the possibility of a jackpot.

The effect determining means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of special effect patterns when a variable time variation pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern is selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines the final number of button images to be proliferated by lottery. The final proliferation number of button images is the final number of button images after proliferation, for example, proliferation to 2 (once), proliferation to 4 (twice), proliferation to 8 (three times), etc. Select one of the following powers of 2. However, as a modified example, the number may increase to a power of a natural number other than 2 (for example, in a production where one button image is divided into three button images, the number becomes a power of 3), There may be cases in which the numbers increase to a regular or irregular number other than the power number (for example, an effect in which buttons that split and buttons that do not split coexist).

The effect determining means 303 executes a lottery to determine the type of comment preview image to be displayed as a comment preview for the final number of proliferations, and sequentially stores the lottery results for the final number of proliferations in a buffer. There are multiple types of comment preview images corresponding to the lottery results for the final multiplication number stored in the buffer, each of which individually suggests a high level of expectation for a jackpot. The performance determining means 303 selects the type of button image so that the type of comment preview image and the type of the corresponding button image match in terms of the level of jackpot expectation that each suggests. For example, if a lottery result of a type with a low expectation of a jackpot is stored as a comment preview, the button image corresponding to the comment preview image is a white button image (also called a "normal button image") of a type with a low expectation of a jackpot. ) is displayed. When a lottery result of the type with the next highest expectation of a jackpot is stored as a comment preview, the button image corresponding to the comment preview image is a blue button image of the type with the next highest expectation of a jackpot ("chance button image"). ) is displayed. When a lottery result of the type with the highest expectation of a jackpot is stored as a comment preview, the red button image ("big chance button image") of the type with the highest expectation of a jackpot is the button image corresponding to the comment preview image. ) is displayed.

For example, the lottery results are stored in the buffer in descending order of jackpot expectation, and the type of button image to be displayed first is the button type with the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first lottery result in the buffer. Each time a performance button 109 is pressed by a player, the next buffer area is referred to by the number of button images that increase, and a button image with a jackpot expectation corresponding to the lottery result stored in the buffer area is displayed. In this way, the performance determining means 303 extracts the lottery results of comment previews from the buffer for the number of button images displayed by pressing the actual performance button 109 by the player, and extracts the lottery results of the comment preview according to the lottery results. Display the button image and comment preview image. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot expectation level is divided into three stages, but as a modified example, it may be four or more stages, or it may be two stages.

Here, when determining the type of button image, we not only select three types: "normal button image," "chance button image," and "big chance button image," but also "chance button image due to promotion" and "big chance button image due to promotion." You may further have two types. "Promote" displays the button image of the type one level lower, and when the predetermined operating conditions (also referred to as "effect development conditions") as a secret trick or hidden function described later are met, the button is pressed. This means promoting the type of image by one level. In other words, the "chance button image due to promotion" is the one that displays the normal button image first and then is promoted to the chance button image, and the "big chance button image due to promotion" is the one that displays the chance button image first and then promotes to the chance button image. This is promoted from the image to the big chance button image. The comment preview image corresponding to the "chance button image" also corresponds to the "chance button image due to promotion", and the comment preview image corresponding to the "big chance button image" also corresponds to the "big chance button image due to promotion". The lottery results for the comment preview will be divided into ``Normal button image'', ``Chance button image due to promotion'', ``Chance button image'', ``Large hit due to promotion'', taking into account cases where the button is not pressed and the promotion is not achieved. The corresponding lottery results are stored in the buffer in the order of "chance button image" and "big chance button image."

As a modification, the effect determining means 303 may first determine the final number of button images to be proliferated, then determine the type and number of button images, and then determine the comment preview. For example, when the final proliferation number is determined to be "8," three white normal button images, two blue chance button images, and three red big chance button images are determined. Then, a lottery is executed three times on a lottery table for comment preview images with low jackpot expectations, the same number as the number of normal button images "3", and the lottery results are stored in a buffer. Similarly, a lottery is executed twice on a lottery table for comment preview images with a high expectation of jackpot for the same number of chance button images as ``2'', and the lottery results are stored in a buffer. Furthermore, the lottery is executed three times on the lottery table for the comment preview image with the highest jackpot expectation for the same number of big chance button images as ``3'', and the lottery results are stored in a buffer. In this way, the lottery results are stored in the buffer in descending order of jackpot expectation, and the type of button image to be displayed first is the button type with the jackpot expectation corresponding to the first lottery result in the buffer. Each time a performance button 109 is pressed by a player, the next buffer area is referred to by the number of button images that increase, and a button image with a jackpot expectation corresponding to the lottery result stored in the buffer area is displayed. For example, if the production button 109 is pressed twice and four button images are displayed, the fourth buffer area will be referenced, so three normal button images and one chance button image will be displayed. Ru. If the button is pressed one more time, four more buffer areas are referred to, so the remaining one chance button image and three big chance button images are displayed.

As another modification, the type of button image to be displayed may be based on a rule that proliferates one level higher type of button image each time a button is split (however, the red big chance button image is the upper limit type). For example, the first button image must be a white normal button image, blue chance button images are multiplied by splitting from the normal button image, and separate chance button images are created by splitting from the normal button image and chance button image. Proliferate the big chance button images. When such regularity is provided, the effect determining means 303 does not need to specifically determine the type of button image.

As yet another modification, the comment preview lottery results may be stored in a buffer separately for each type of corresponding button image. In that case, the button images are not displayed in descending order of expectation, and a great chance button image can suddenly appear.

FIG. 38 schematically shows an example of screen transition of button effects in the fourth embodiment. In the performance based on the special performance pattern of this embodiment, a first button image 570 and a first button press instruction 565 are displayed as in the first screen 560. The first button image 570 is a white regular button image that suggests a low jackpot expectation, and the first button press instruction 565 is a character string or a message prompting the player to operate the production button 109, such as "Press the button!" This is the image. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the valid period of the effect button 109, an effect display such as splitting the second button image 571 from the first button image 570 is displayed, as shown on the second screen 561. It grows into two button images. The second button image 571 that has appeared due to proliferation is a blue chance button image that suggests a jackpot expectation level that is one step higher than the first button image 570.

On the second screen 561, a second button press instruction 566, which is a character string or an image thereof, which prompts the player to operate the production button 109, such as "Press the button!", is displayed again. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the validity period of the effect button 109, the first button image 570 is divided into the first button image 570 and the third button image 572, and the second button image 571 is divided into a second button image 571 and a fourth button image 573, resulting in four button images as shown in the third screen 562. The third button image 572 that has appeared due to proliferation is a blue chance button image that suggests a jackpot expectation level that is one step higher than the first button image 570. Further, the fourth button image 573 that has appeared due to proliferation is a red big chance button image that suggests a jackpot expectation level that is one step higher than the second button image 571.

On the third screen 562, as a so-called trick or hidden function, a validity period is set that is not made clear to the player. That is, although an explicit instruction such as "Press the button!" that prompts the player to operate the production button 109 is not displayed, the display button is not displayed in an implicit manner such as blinking the lamp of the production button 109 and suggests the timing to press the production button. 109 validity period. On the other hand, when the performance button 109 is pressed in a predetermined manner by the player within the valid period of the performance button 109, one of the button images is promoted to a button image with a higher expectation of a jackpot. In the example of this figure, as shown in the fourth screen 563, the third button image 572 changes from a blue chance button image to a red big chance button image. In this embodiment, the player is required to press the performance button 109 a predetermined number of times as a performance development condition for a trick or hidden function that promotes the type of button image. The establishment of an event other than the above may be used as a performance development condition. For example, the performance development condition may be that a predetermined number of balls enter a predetermined ball opening within the validity period, or that the player wins a predetermined lottery.

On the fourth screen 563, a third button press instruction 567, which is a character string or an image thereof, prompting the player to operate the production button 109, such as "Press the button!", is displayed again. On the other hand, when the effect button 109 is pressed by the player within the validity period of the effect button 109, the first button image 570, the second button image 571, the third button image 572, as shown in the fifth screen 564, The fourth button image 573 changes to a first comment preview image 575, a second comment preview image 576, a third comment preview image 577, and a fourth comment preview image 578, respectively. The button images before and after the change correspond to the high expectations of a jackpot suggested by the comment preview, and the first button image 570, which is not a chance button image, is the first comment preview with a low jackpot expectation of "fall into darkness". The image changes to an image 575, but the second button image 571, which is a chance button image, changes to a second comment preview image 576 with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, ``This light is''. In addition, the third button image 572 and the fourth button image 573, which are big chance button images, change to a third comment preview image 577 and a fourth comment preview image 578, which have even higher expectations for a jackpot, such as "Very hot!!" .

On the other hand, if the effect button 109 is not operated within the effective period of the effect button 109 on the first screen 540, the effective period does not occur from then on, and the button images such as from the second screen 561 to the fourth screen 563 No division or multiplication, no promotion. However, if the production button 109 is pressed in response to a final button press instruction such as the third button press instruction 567 on the fourth screen 563, only the comment preview image corresponding to the first button image 570 is displayed. . As a modified example, a comment preview image may also not be displayed if the production button 109 is not pressed even once in response to a button press instruction. As another modification, even if there is a valid period in which no button was pressed, it does not prevent the occurrence of subsequent valid periods, and the number of buttons may be increased later. As described above, when the subsequent performance is omitted, an alternative performance may be displayed, for example, in the case of a battle performance, a process in which a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is evenly matched and cannot be resolved. .

As yet another modification example, the first button press instruction 565 and the second button press instruction 566 are not displayed on the first screen 560 and the second screen 561, and the validity period of the performance button 109 is not set, and the performance button is pressed by the player. The specification may be such that the button image splits or multiplies every time a predetermined period of time elapses without pressing 109.

FIG. 39 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button presentation of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 39(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 39(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of presentation periods constituting the button presentation. FIG. 39(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 39(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 39(e) shows the timing and length of the effective period of the effect button 109. FIG. 39(f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the production button 109.

In the button performance exemplified in this figure, as shown in FIG. 39(b), a preview performance suggesting a reach occurrence is displayed during the "pre-reach notice" period of S1120, and the first button performance "step 1" (S1121) is displayed, a branch effect (S1122) is displayed, the second button effect "Step 2" (S1123) is displayed, a branch effect (S1124) is displayed, and the third button effect is displayed. "Step 3" (S1125) is displayed, a branch effect (S1126) is displayed, and a comment preview effect (S1127) is displayed.

In "Step 1" (S1121), a first button press instruction 565 requesting pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, and a first validity period of the effect button 109 is set (S1131). The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1130) until it reaches the first valid period (S1131). During the first validity period, a white normal button image is displayed (S1150), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in white (S1140). The lighting of the lamp of the production button 109 indicates that the production button 109 is valid, and the lighting color indicates the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. When the player presses the effect button 109 during the first validity period (S1131) (S1160), a sound effect is output (S1170), and a branch effect (S1122) that incites whether or not the normal button image will be split is output. After that, the chance button image is separated from the normal button image.

In "Step 2" (S1123), a second button press instruction 566 requesting pressing of the effect button 109 is displayed, and a second validity period of the effect button 109 is set (S1133). The period from after the first validity period (S1131) to the second validity period (S1133) is an invalid period (S1132). During the second validity period (S1133), a white normal button image and a blue chance button image are displayed (S1151), and the lamp of the production button 109 is lit in blue (S1141). In addition, when a plurality of types of button images are displayed, the lamp of the performance button 109 is, in principle, lit in accordance with the same color as the type with the highest jackpot expectation among the displayed button images. When the player presses the performance button 109 during the second validity period (S1133) (S1161), a sound effect is output (S1171), and a branching performance that incites whether or not the normal button image and chance button image will be split. Through (S1124), the chance button image is divided from the normal button image, and the great chance button image is divided from the chance button image.

In "Step 3" (S1125), first, a third valid period (S1135) of the effect button 109 is provided. The period from after the second validity period (S1133) to the third validity period (S1135) is an invalid period (S1134). However, the third validity period is the validity period as a trick or hidden function that is not disclosed to the player, and the normal button image, chance button image, and big chance button image are displayed, but it is exceptionally the one with the highest jackpot expectation. The lamp of the production button 109 is flashed in the same color as the normal button image with the lowest expectation of jackpot, rather than the big chance button image with the highest jackpot expectation. As a modified example, the lamp of the performance button 109 may be simply lit in a color with low jackpot expectation, or conversely, it may be turned off in a special lighting manner that is not in accordance with the principle, implicitly indicating that the expiration date has expired. May be suggested. During the third validity period, when the production button 109 is pressed in a predetermined manner, for example, twice (S1162, S1163), a sound effect is output according to the press (S1172, S1173), and either button The type of image is promoted by one level. For example, one of the chance button images is promoted to a great chance button image. In the example shown in this figure, an example has been described in which two presses are required as the performance development condition, but as a modified example, a specification may be made that requires a larger number of presses, for example, 10 consecutive presses.

In "Step 3" (S1125), a third button press instruction 567 is displayed that requests pressing of the effect button 109, and a fourth validity period of the effect button 109 is set (S1137). The period from after the third valid period (S1135) to the fourth valid period (S1137) is an invalid period (S1136). When the player presses the effect button 109 during the fourth validity period (S1137) (S1164), a sound effect is output (S1174), and a branch effect (S1126) that incites whether or not each button image will be split is generated. After that, each button image changes to a comment preview image, and a comment preview effect is displayed (S1127). During S1126 and S1127, the effect button 109 is disabled (S1138).

If no operation input is made by the player during the first validity period (S1131), second validity period (S1133), and third validity period (S1135), the button image may be divided or multiplied or the button type may be promoted. is not displayed. In that case, the execution of the subsequent button effects is omitted, and the remaining period is replaced with an alternative effect. In the alternative performance, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button effect consists of a battle effect, if the effect button 109 is not operated, an effect in which the friendly character and the enemy character are in an even fight with no winner or loser is displayed as an alternative effect, and the button image is displayed as is. Otherwise, the final success/fail branch performance is reached without the button performance being displayed. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative effect to the normal button effect, it may be possible to switch to an effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

As a modification of this embodiment, when a button image with one level higher expectation proliferates due to division, the button image can be evacuated to the edge or corner of the screen and kept (stocked) until the subsequent production. You can also use it as The evacuated button image is utilized in a later performance as in the second and third embodiments, and has the role of foretelling that a performance with high expectations for a jackpot will be executed in the subsequent performance. In this case, the types of button images that can be saved and stocked may be limited to chance button images and big chance button images that have relatively high jackpot expectations.

<Fifth example>
This embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the underlying technology, the first embodiment, the second embodiment, the third embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, and the explanation of common points will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of preview performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special performance pattern" or "notice scenario pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image imitating the appearance of the performance button 109 is used. is displayed on the screen to prompt the player to input an operation, and prior to the start of the period in which the operation of the performance button 109 is valid, a performance (hereinafter referred to as "button (referred to as "timer effect"). As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot expectation level is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The button timer effect in this embodiment is based on the premise that when a player presses the effect button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is displayed, a predetermined effect such as a win/fail branch effect or a reach effect can be executed. The "predetermined performance" here may be various kinds of reach performances, or may be other preview performances such as comment previews. Before the effective period of the effect button 109 starts, a preview effect indicating the time required or waiting time until the start of the effect in the form of a "button timer" is displayed near the button image. As a result, compared to the case where the effective period of the effect button 109 starts at the same time as the button image appears or before or after the appearance of the button image, it is possible to inform the player of the start of the effective period in advance and make him wait, and the player can press the effect button 109 in advance. It is possible to increase the possibility that 109 will be properly operated within the validity period. Note that the "required time" or "waiting time" may be an apparent time displayed for presentation purposes, and may be configured to add changes such as fast forwarding, rewinding, and pausing to the measured time display. You can.

The performance determining means 303 selects one of the plurality of types of special performance patterns by lottery when a variable time variation pattern and a variable performance pattern corresponding to the special performance pattern are selected. When a special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to display a button image and a button timer, the display timing thereof, and the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, at least two types of special effect patterns will be explained as button timer effects using a button timer. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, these two types of special performance patterns will be referred to as a first special performance pattern and a second special performance pattern.

FIG. 40 schematically shows an example of screen transition of button timer effect in the first special effect pattern of the fifth embodiment. In the button timer effect based on the first special effect pattern, a button image 590 and a first standby state display 600 are displayed as in the first screen 580. The button image 590 is a white normal button image that suggests a low jackpot expectation, and the first standby state display 600 is a character string or a character string indicating that the effective period of the production button 109 is not yet started, such as "waiting". It is an image. Thereafter, the button timer performance is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen so as not to interfere with the fluctuating display and fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern 506.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example will be described in which a button image is displayed together with a first standby state display 600 such as "on standby" from a symbol variation effect that is earlier than the symbol variation effect that is originally the target of the button timer effect. In the example, the button image may be displayed only in the symbol variation effect that is the target of the original button timer effect. Alternatively, as a general rule, a button image and the words "on standby" may be displayed at all times in the corner of the screen in all symbol variation effects, and this may be positioned as a "button standby effect" to distinguish it from a "button timer effect." In that case, only the performance that displays a countdown timer or the like together with the button image in the symbol variation performance that is the target of the original button timer performance may be referred to as the "button timer performance."

In the symbol variation performance that is the target of the button timer performance, a second standby state display 601 is displayed above the button image 590. The second screen 581 of the second standby state display 601 is an image of a timer that counts down the effective period of the effect button 109 or the required time or standby time until the start of the suggestion. The second standby state display 601 foretells that the effective period of the production button 109 will start after the remaining time indicated on the timer, such as "10 seconds remaining", has elapsed. The "timer" in this embodiment displays the remaining time in a countdown manner, but in a modified example, it may display the time required to start the validity period in a manner that counts up from zero. Alternatively, it may be displayed in the form of an indicator (meter display or gauge display) instead of numbers. When displaying the timer with an indicator, in the above-mentioned "button standby effect", an effect may be performed that increases the amount of time displayed by the indicator (increases the time measured by the timer) based on the result of the effect. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that a button effect will occur in the latter half of the fluctuation (for example, after the development of super reach). Also, depending on the amount of time suggested by the timer, the display mode (color, size, shape of decorative design, etc.) of indicators during "button standby effect" or "button timer effect" may be changed. . For example, by replacing the numbers and indicators that are blue in the default mode with red numbers and indicators, it may be configured to give the player a sense of anticipation even while the timer is counting. Furthermore, in accordance with a change in the display mode added to an indicator or the like, an effect that suggests the same display mode may be added to the button image when the button is presented.

Below the button image 590, a first button instruction display 610, which is a character string "button in preparation", is displayed. The first button instruction display 610 is a string of characters that informs the player that the effective period of the effect button 109 is about to start and prepares the player for operating the effect button 109.

The button image 590 is displayed with a first character image 591 attached to the right side thereof. The first character image 591 is an image used for a promotion effect that prompts whether or not to promote the type of the button image 590 based on the action of the image. In this embodiment, the motif is a girl character holding an umbrella, but the present invention is not limited to such a character image, and images other than the character may be used.

The third screen 582 shows that the button image is being promoted. The promotion effect is an image in which the "umbrella" of the first character image 591 covers the button image 590 that was displayed up to the second screen 581 (mainly, only the unfolded umbrella is displayed and the button image is almost hidden by the umbrella). This image is called the "second character image 592"), and while the button image is hidden by the umbrella, it is an effect that stimulates whether or not it has been replaced with a type of button image with a higher expectation of a jackpot. be. In the promotion performance, a third standby state display 602 displayed above the second character image 592 indicates that the timer has been stopped and reset, such as "Seconds remaining", and that the waiting time has been extended. It is suggested. Below the second character image 592, a character string such as "Drive gear in preparation" is displayed as a second button instruction display 611. The "drive gear" here refers to a button image with a lever, and is suggested to be promoted to the type of button image with the highest jackpot expectation. It is suggested that the expectation level of jackpot has increased due to these promotional performances. In addition, as a modification of the third standby state display 602 in the promotion performance, instead of a character string such as "3 seconds remaining" suddenly switching to a character string such as "seconds remaining", a performance that incites whether or not the change will occur is possible. By adding this, the player's expectations for the promotion performance may be increased.

On the fourth screen 583, the "umbrella" that is the second character image 592 on the third screen 582 moves to the right from the button image position and returns to the first character image 591, and also has a lever as the button image after promotion. Button image 593 is exposed. Below the lever-equipped button image 593, words urging the player to operate the lever-equipped button image 593 are displayed as a third button instruction display 612 using a character string such as "Pull the drive gear!".

In the above figure, an example has been described in which a promotion effect occurs and the type of button image is promoted, but the promotion effect does not always occur, and there are cases where the promotion effect does not occur. Furthermore, even if a promotion effect occurs, it does not necessarily mean that the user will be promoted, and even if the "umbrella" of the second character image 592 returns to its original position, the type of button image may remain the same as before the promotion effect. .

FIG. 41 schematically shows an example of screen transition of button timer effect in the second special effect pattern of the fifth embodiment. The second special effect pattern is used especially in variable effects that develop into super reach. In the button timer effect based on the second special effect pattern, a first button image 630 and a first standby state display 640 are displayed on the first screen 620, similar to the first screen 580 of the first special effect pattern. The first button image 630 is a white regular button image that suggests a low jackpot expectation, and the first standby state display 640 is a character string indicating that the effective period of the production button 109 has not yet started, such as "Waiting". Or an image of it. Thereafter, the button timer performance is displayed at the lower left corner of the screen so as not to interfere with the fluctuating display and fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern 506.

The second screen 621 is similar to the second screen 581 of the first special effect pattern, and a second standby state display 641 is displayed above the first button image 630. The second standby state display 641 is an image of a timer that counts down the effective period of the effect button 109 or the time required or waiting time until the start of its suggestion. The second standby state display 641 foretells that the effective period of the production button 109 will start after the remaining time indicated on the timer, such as "10 seconds remaining", has elapsed.

Below the first button image 630, a first button instruction display 650, which is a character string "button in preparation", is displayed. At this time, one of the three decorative patterns 506 stops. The first button instruction display 650 is a text in the form of a character string that informs the player that the effective period of the performance button 109 is about to start and prepares the player for operating the performance button 109. These previews suggest the occurrence of a reach and a high degree of expectation of a jackpot. The first button image 630 is displayed with a first character image 591 attached to the right side thereof. The first character image 591 is an image used for a promotion effect in which the character's actions indicate whether or not the type of the first button image 630 will be promoted later. In this embodiment, the motif is a girl character holding an umbrella, but the present invention is not limited to such a character image, and images other than the character may be used.

The third screen 622 shows that the button image is being promoted. This promotion effect is displayed when the decorative pattern 506 reaches the reach, and the effect of dividing or multiplying is displayed on the first button image 630 that has been displayed up to the second screen 621 in the same way as in the fourth embodiment. Due to the division or proliferation, the second button image 632 and the third button image 633 multiply from the first button image 630 and are displayed vertically side by side. The proliferation of button images is repeated until the button timer reaches zero, and the large number of button images that have grown indicates a high possibility that the type of button image will be promoted. A third standby state display 642 is displayed above the first button image 630, second button image 632, and third button image 633, a first character image 591 is displayed on the right, and a second button is displayed below. An instruction display 651 is displayed. The third standby state display 642 shows the progress state of the button timer, such as "3 seconds remaining." As the second button instruction display 651, a character string such as "button in stock" indicates that the button image is divided and multiplied and left on the screen. In this way, the button images are repeatedly divided or multiplied until the remaining time shown in the third standby state display 642 becomes zero, and the button images are stored.

When the remaining time reaches zero and it is time to execute the preview performance that is the target of the button timer (here, the stage of displaying the winning or losing of whether or not three decorative patterns 506 of the same type will be aligned is exemplified), multiple multiplied An animation in which the button images are combined into one button image is displayed, and a button image 634 with a lever, such as the fourth screen 623, is displayed as the combined button image. The type of button images after promotion differs depending on the number of button images before promotion. For example, when two button images are combined, they are promoted to a blue chance button image, when three button images are combined, they are promoted to a white button image with a lever as shown in the figure, and six button images are promoted to a white button image with a lever. When combined, it is promoted to a button image with a red lever. When the effect of stocking button images like the third screen 622 is activated, the stock of two or more button images is always displayed, and since the combination of these multiple button images is guaranteed, it is possible to create a button image with more than a chance button image. His promotion has been confirmed, and expectations for the jackpot are high. In addition, as a modification, instead of promoting according to the number of stocked button images, it may be possible to perform promotion as many times as the number of stocked button images. In that case, for example, the effect may be such that stocked button images are thrown one character image at a time against the main button image to encourage whether or not the button image will be promoted. Alternatively, an animation may be used to display a plurality of button images colliding with each other one by one and merging, and each time the merging is performed, it may be displayed to encourage whether or not to be promoted to a button image of a different color.

On the fourth screen 623, a button image 634 with a lever is displayed, which is a combination of a plurality of button images and is promoted. Below the lever-equipped button image 634, words urging the player to operate the lever-equipped button image 634 are displayed as a third button instruction display 652 using a character string such as "Pull the drive gear!". A first character image 591 is displayed to the right of the button image 634 with a lever. When the performance button 109, which is a button with a lever, is operated by the player, a winning/losing branching performance is displayed, which is a winning/losing performance of whether or not three decorative symbols 506 of the same type are aligned. As a modified example, in addition to changing the button image to a chance button according to the number of stocked button images, it is also possible to select a pattern of changing the operation mode for the production button 109 according to the number of stocked buttons. It may be configured so that. With this configuration, for example, in a situation where three button images are stocked, when a button timer target effect is executed, a player who expects a button image with a lever to be displayed It is possible to provide surprise and interest by switching to a presentation that requires multiple operations, such as a presentation of repeated presses of the button 109. Further, it may be configured to have a pattern that executes both the promotion of the button image in this embodiment and the change in the operation mode in the modified example.

FIG. 42 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process in an example of the button timer presentation based on the first special presentation pattern. FIG. 42(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 42(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of performance periods constituting the button timer performance. FIG. 42(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 42(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 42(e) shows the timing and length of the effective period of the effect button 109. FIG. 42(f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the production button 109.

During the performance period based on the first special performance pattern, a plurality of preview performances are displayed, two of which are button preview performances. One of the two button preview performances is a "non-target button preview" and the other is a "target button preview." The "non-target button preview" is a preview performance that does not involve a button timer performance, that is, it is not subject to advance notice using a button timer. The "target button preview" is a preview performance that is accompanied by a button timer performance, that is, a preview performance that is subject to advance notice using a button timer.

First, during the "previous variation" period of S1220 in FIG. "Medium" is displayed. The lamp of the production button 109 is white and is switched between bright and dark in slow cycles (S1240). While the button image and the words "on standby" are displayed, a notification sound indicating that the button timer effect is about to start may be output based on the preread result (S1270). In addition, although the size shown in the figure is expressed small for convenience, the "foreground fluctuation" includes a case where it is a plurality of symbol fluctuation periods.

In the symbol variation period targeted by the first special performance pattern (S1221), a "non-target button notice" is started at a predetermined timing (S1222), and the lamp of the performance button 109 flashes in white (S1241). A first valid period (S1231) of the effect button 109 is provided during the "non-target button notice". The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1230) until it reaches the first valid period (S1231). When the performance button 109 is operated during the first valid period (S1260), a branch performance that incites whether or not to develop into the next performance is displayed (S1223). In parallel with the above-mentioned "non-target button notice", a button timer effect is displayed prior to the "target button notice" in which the button timer counts down the period until the effective period of the effect button 109 starts, as explained below.

At a predetermined timing, a button timer that is a combination of a button image and a character string such as "10 seconds remaining" is displayed (S1252), and a start sound is output to notify the start of the countdown by the timer (S1271). Next, before the countdown timer reaches zero, the character image overlaps the button image and the button becomes invisible, and the countdown timer is stopped and reset by displaying "Seconds remaining" and the promotion effect starts ( S1253). The lamp of the effect button 109 changes one after another in a plurality of emitting colors (S1242), and a sound that prompts whether or not the type of button image is promoted is output (S1272). Thereafter, a confirmation sound indicating confirmation of the button image type is output (S1273), and a promoted button image (for example, a button image with a lever) appears (S1254). Above the button image, the value of the time remaining on the timer is reset, such as "30 seconds left," and the countdown is restarted. The lamp of the production button 109 flashes white at high speed, indicating that the "target button notice" is about to start. Note that although not shown, sound effects and the like at the time of button operation (S1260) in the non-target button notice (S1222) may also be output as a sound effect. If the sound effect when operating the non-target button notice overlaps with the excitement sound (S1272) or the confirmation sound (S1273) in this embodiment, which of the operation sound effect, excitement sound, and confirmation sound will be used in the game. The output volume, the position of the output speaker (audio channel), etc. are set based on a predetermined priority order depending on whether the output gives a sense of expectation to the listener.

The remaining time on the countdown timer reaches zero, and a "target button notice" is displayed (S1224). A second valid period (S1233) of the effect button 109 is provided during the "target button preview". The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1232) between the second valid period (S1233) and the first valid period (S1231). In the second valid period, a button image with a lever is displayed (S1255), and an operation instruction such as "Pull the drive gear!" is displayed, and the lamp of the production button 109 lights up in red (S1244). When the performance button 109 is operated during the second validity period (S1261), a win/fail branch performance that stimulates the display of the win/fail result is displayed (S1225). During the win/fail branch performance, the performance button 109 is inactive (S1234).

Even if no operation input is made by the player during the first validity period (S1231) and the second validity period (S1233), the subsequent performance may be displayed, or the subsequent performance may be omitted, The remaining period may be replaced with an alternative performance. In the alternative performance, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button preview performance consists of a battle performance, if the performance button 109 is not operated, a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character remain in an even fight with no winner or loser will be displayed as an alternative performance, and the button will remain as it is. The final judgment performance is reached without any image or subsequent performance being displayed. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative performance in place of the normal subsequent performance, it may be possible to switch to a performance in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

FIG. 43 schematically shows a preview scenario determination table. In the "ID" column, preview scenario pattern IDs from 1 to 19 are shown, and in this figure, 19 types of preview scenario patterns are illustrated. Each of the plurality of variable performance patterns selected by the performance determining means 303 is associated with 3 to 6 of the 19 types of preview scenario patterns based on the variable time, and these 3 to 6 types of preview One of the scenario patterns is selected by lottery. For example, when a 50-second variation pattern is selected on the main board 200 and a 50-second variation performance pattern A is selected by the performance determination means 303 as a variation performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, the variation performance is selected as the preview scenario pattern. One of several patterns corresponding to pattern A (all patterns are composed of scenarios corresponding to 50 seconds of variable performance) is selected by lottery.

As a preview scenario pattern, one performance scenario is constructed by dividing one variable performance period into a maximum of eight blocks, and combining performances such as a preview performance and a reach performance displayed for each block. Of the blocks with a maximum of 8 periods, 6 blocks from "Block A" to "Block F" are pre-reach notices, and "Block G" and "Block H" are post-reach notices. However, these eight blocks are not necessarily divided periods of the variable performance period, and the preview performances selected for each block may be displayed so that part of the period overlaps with each other. . In other words, "Block A" to "Block H" do not define an absolute performance period, but only a relative performance order, or each block is a preview performance that can be performed at the same time. It merely indicates a category.

In addition, as a "notice scenario determination table", we have prepared multiple types of tables with different types of preview scenario patterns and selection trends, and the types of variable performance patterns or the high expectation level of jackpot, the background image being displayed, the performance mode, etc. It may be determined which preview scenario determination table to refer to depending on the situation. The type of preview performance to be selected according to the preview scenario pattern and the lottery table for determining the type are also based on the type of variable performance pattern, the level of jackpot expectation, the background image being displayed, the performance mode, etc. It may be determined that

In the preview scenario determination table of FIG. 43, "Block A" and "Block B" in the early stages are "A- 1," "A-2," "B-1," and "B-2," or no particular effect may be displayed during that period, such as "None." "A-1" and "A-2" may be, for example, a comment preview, a motion of a character image, a swinging motion of a movable accessory, or the like. "B-1" and "B-2" may be, for example, a pseudo-continuous variation performance that uses symbols to incite whether or not there will be continuous fluctuations, or a performance that incites whether a reach is established or not.

For "Block C" and "Block D", either "C-1" to "C-4" or "D-1" to "D-3" will be displayed as "normal notice", or "None" will be displayed. ” In some cases, no special effects are displayed during that period. For example, in the production pattern with pattern ID "1", "Block A" displays the production "A-1", "Block B" displays no particular production, and "Block C" displays the production "C-1". 1" is displayed, and in "Block D", no particular performance is displayed.

Here, an underlined effect such as "D-1" indicates a button preview effect in which a button image may be displayed. However, whether or not the button image is actually displayed is determined by another lottery shown in FIG. 44. Among the button preview performances, the lottery to determine whether or not to display the button timer is executed for pattern IDs "13", "15", "16", "18", and "19" (all IDs are underlined. (This is a preview scenario pattern in which "Yes" is written in the "Timer" column on the far right.)

Among blocks of maximum eight periods, the middle "Block E" is a presentation period of "development notice", and "E-1", which is a notice presentation suggesting development to reach, may be displayed. "Block F" is a production period for "reach promotion", and "F-1", which is a production that stimulates whether or not it will develop into reach, may be displayed. "F-1" is a button preview effect in which a button image may be displayed, as indicated by the underline. "Block G" and "Block H" are performance periods after the start of reach, and in "block G" in the first half of reach, any of "reach a" to "reach f" may be displayed. "Reach G" may be displayed in "Block H" in the latter half of the reach. Among these reach effects, button images may be displayed in the underlined "reach a", "reach c", "reach d", "reach f", and "reach g".

FIG. 44 schematically shows a table for determining the display timing of the button timer. As shown in Figure 43, when the five types of preview scenario pattern IDs "13," "15," "16," "18," and "19" are selected, the button timer's display timing is determined by lottery and displayed. Ru. As shown in the right column of the figure, a lottery value range is assigned to each of the IDs "13," "15," "16," "18," and "19," and one of the timings is selected. The button timer is displayed at one of the three timings from "timing 1" to "timing 3", when it is displayed at any two locations, and when it is displayed at all three locations. It is possible. For example, in the period of "Notice C to E", the performance of "D-1" in the example of FIG. 43 corresponds, and in the period of "Notice F", the performance of "F-1" in the example of FIG. In the period of "notice G, H", the times of presentation of "reach a", "reach c", "reach d", "reach f", and "reach g" in the example of FIG. 43 correspond.

For example, in the case of ID "13" and "15", one of three display timings of the button timer is selected: "timing 1 only", "timing 2 only", and "timing 1 and 2". For example, in the case of ID "16", one of four display timings of the button timer is selected: "timing 1 only", "timing 2 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 1 and 2". For example, in the case of ID "18", one of three display timings of the button timer is selected: "timing 1 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 1 and 3". For example, in the case of ID "19", one of three display timings of the button timer is selected: "timing 2 only", "timing 3 only", and "timing 2 and 3".

In the example in this figure, the display timing is determined from three ways: "timing 1", "timing 2", and "timing 3", but as a modified example, "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 2 (with promotion)", and "timing 3" are used. ” and “Timing 3 (with promotion)”, the display timing may be determined in combination with whether or not the button image type is promoted based on the promotion effect. However, the number indicating this timing (timing N) may indicate the order from the start of symbol fluctuation, and may be the same as the number indicating the timing of the button preview effect that is subject to the countdown by the button timer (timing X). If it is smaller (that is, earlier in time than the timing of the button preview performance), the button timer display is determined. As a modification, the button timer and the numbers indicating the timing of the button preview performance may be set to indicate the order from the end of symbol variation. Also, if the timing N of the button timer is a larger number than the timing X of the button preview effect (when the timing of the button timer is later than the timing of the preview effect), the timing of the button timer It is also possible to forcibly set the timing to the earliest "timing 1".

In addition, if the fluctuating performance ends without reaching reach, the lottery shown in Figure 44 is not performed, or regardless of the lottery result shown in Figure 44, it is the preview period with the lowest jackpot expectation level before reach. "Notice C" may be forcibly determined as the display timing of the button timer.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, by determining the type and timing of the preview effect based on the preview scenario pattern, the display timing of the button preview effect is determined, and when the button preview effect is included, the button timer is set. Decide whether to display or not. These may be determined by the performance determining means 303 through a batch lottery, or may be determined through individual lottery. If it is determined that the button timer is to be displayed, the display timing of the button timer may be determined by referring to a lottery table in which the button timer effect is likely to be selected.

When the preview scenario pattern corresponding to the second special effect pattern described above is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not the button image is stocked. In that case, the type of final button image is already determined in the preview scenario pattern (which of the normal button image, chance button image, or button image with lever will be displayed in the end is determined in the preview scenario pattern). ), the number of button images to be stocked and the timing of stocking are determined depending on the type of button image.

<Sixth Example>
This example will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the underlying technology, the first example, the second example, the third example, the fourth example, and the fifth example, and the common points will be explained. Omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of preview performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special performance pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image that imitates the appearance of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen. A preview performance (hereinafter referred to as "button preview performance") is displayed to prompt the player to input an operation. In the button preview performance, if the operating means is operated within the valid period of the operation input, the displayed button image is evacuated to a rendered area provided at a predetermined position on the screen and accumulated up to a predetermined limit. One or more accumulated button images can be used in subsequent performances. As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot expectation level is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The button preview performance in this embodiment is based on the premise that when a player presses the performance button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is displayed, a predetermined performance such as a win/fail branch performance or a reach performance can be executed. The "predetermined performance" here may be various kinds of reach performances, or may be other preview performances such as comment previews.

The effect determining means 303 can select one of the plurality of types of special effect patterns by lottery when a variable time variation pattern and a variable effect pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern are selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the button preview effect, the number of times it is displayed, the display timing, the type of button image, etc.

FIG. 45 schematically shows an example of screen transition of the button preview effect in the sixth embodiment. In this button preview performance, as in the first screen 660, a button image 671 is displayed on the screen along with a character string instructing the button to be pressed, such as "Press the button!". The button image 671 is a white normal button image that suggests a low jackpot expectation. A rendered area 675 is provided in the lower left corner of the screen. The effected area 675 is an area where button images displayed in past button preview effects are reduced and evacuated, and up to five reduced button images are accumulated as a history in the effect execution order in the effected area 675. Ru. From the left of the rendered area 675, the first button image 670a, second button image 670b, third button image 670c, fourth button image 670d, and fifth button image 670e are arranged in chronological order. The first button image 670a, the second button image 670b, and the fourth button image 670d are white normal button images, the fifth button image 670e is a blue chance button image, and the third button image 670c is a red big chance button image. This is a button image.

When the player presses the effect button 109 within the valid period, the corresponding effect is executed, and then the button image 671 is reduced in size and evacuated to the effect completed area 675, as shown in the second screen 661. At this time, the first button image 670a, which is the oldest image, is deleted, and the positions of the second button image 670b, third button image 670c, fourth button image 670d, and fifth button image 670e are moved to the left one frame at a time. Then, the reduced button image of the newly saved button image 671 is stored at the right end position of the rendered area 675 as the sixth button image 670f. The above is the basic display process of the button image in the button preview performance. As a general rule, up to five types of button images are stored in the rendered area 675 as a history of button images in a memory such as the sub-RAM 311 in a first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner. When a new button effect occurs, the effect determining means 303 deletes the oldest button image type from the stored button image history and adds a new button image type. In the rendered area 675, button images of the types stored in this history are displayed in the order of their storage positions.

In the button preview effect, a button introduction effect may be displayed before the button image appears. The button introduction effect may be displayed as a preview effect that foretells the appearance of the button image. The button introduction performance is a performance that, prior to displaying the button image and button operation instructions, selects which of multiple types of button images will be displayed from among the past button images displayed in the staged area 675. It is. A plurality of types of button images are accumulated in the staged area 675, each indicating a high level of expectation for a jackpot, and depending on which button image is selected, the level of expectation for a jackpot for the button preview performance is determined, and the game This can increase people's expectations. Furthermore, if, in principle, the button introduction effect is executed only when selecting a type of chance button image or more, the expectation of a jackpot above a certain level can be expected by the display of the effect for selecting a button image. In the button introduction effect shown in the third screen 662, a character image 672 appears in or near the effected area 675, and the character image 672 is displayed to move left and right to represent the selection of the button image. . In the example shown in the figure, the character image 672 selects the third button image 670c, which is a big chance button image, takes it out of the rendered area 675, and enlarges it while pushing it to the approximate center of the screen.

Whether or not to execute the button introduction effect is determined by the effect determining means 303. The types of button images displayed in the past five button preview performances are stored as a history. When executing a new button preview performance, the performance determining means 303 refers to whether a button image that can be displayed in the new button preview performance is included in the past five history. The effect determining means 303 determines execution of the button introduction effect when the history includes a button image that can be displayed in a new button preview effect. That is, the effect is such that a button image that has been displayed within the past five times is taken out of the effected area 675 and redisplayed in the center. For example, if you want to retrieve the second button image from the oldest in the history, retrieve the data for the second button image from the oldest among the stored history of button images, delete it from the history, and delete the data from the 3rd to 5th button images. Move or rewrite the address of the storage location as the data of the 2nd to 4th button images, and then move the new button image, that is, the data of the retrieved button image, to the latest (5th) position after the button preview effect. to add. However, depending on the decision timing of the button introduction effect, the oldest button image in the history may be deleted from the screen before or after the execution timing of the actual button introduction effect. The button image may be excluded from reference. Alternatively, at the timing of determining the button introduction effect, only if the previous button preview effect is being executed (that is, the timing when the history of the button image is about to be updated), the oldest button image in the history is displayed. It may also be a specification that is not referenced. On the other hand, if you want to decide whether or not to execute a button introduction effect at a fixed timing such as the start of symbol variation, regardless of the update timing of the button image history, the oldest button image in the history is uniformly referred to. It may be excluded. In addition, the history of the button image will be referenced not at the start of the symbol change, but at the timing a predetermined short time (for example, 5 seconds) back from the start timing of the button preview effect, so as not to overlap with the update timing of the button image history. You can also do this. However, if the button preview performance is executed immediately after the start of symbol variation, the history of button images may be referred to at the start of symbol variation as an exception.

As a modified example, the effect determining means 303 first determines whether or not to execute the button introduction effect, refers to the history of button images, and cancels the button introduction effect if there is no button image that can be displayed in the history. You can also use it as In addition, if it is decided to perform a button preview effect multiple times, for example, if a great chance button image is scheduled to be displayed in a button preview effect to be executed later, but there is no great chance button image in the history, A great chance button image may be displayed and added to the history in the button preview performance to be executed first, and then the button introduction performance may be executed in the button preview performance to be executed later.

FIG. 46 is a time chart schematically showing the production process in the button preview production of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 46(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image. FIG. 46(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of performance periods constituting the button timer performance. FIG. 46(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 46(d) shows the lighting period and timing of the lamp of the production button 109, its length, lighting color, or lighting mode. FIG. 46(e) shows the timing and length of the valid period of the effect button 109. FIG. 46(f) shows the operation timing and operation mode of the effect button 109.

In the example shown in this figure, three button preview effects are displayed including the previous symbol change. One of the three button preview performances is a "target button preview" that is the target of the button introduction performance, and the remaining two are "non-target button previews" that are not accompanied by the button introduction performance.

First, in the period of "foreign variation" (S1320) shown in FIG. 46(b), a button preview performance is executed as a non-target button preview performance (S1321). During this time, the chance button image and the five reduced button images accumulated in the effected area 675 are displayed (S1350), the effect button 109 becomes valid (S1331), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in blue (S1340). ). The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1330) until it reaches the first valid period (S1331). When the performance button 109 is operated during the first valid period (S1360), a branch performance that incites whether or not to develop into the next performance is displayed (S1322). The oldest button image on the left of the five button images in the rendered area 675 is erased, the remaining four button images are moved one frame at a time to the left, and the reduced image of the blue chance button image is placed in the rendered area. 675 and joins it (S1351).

Next, during the period of "the change" (S1323) shown in FIG. The five reduced button images are displayed (S1352), the effect button 109 enters the second valid period (S1333), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in white (S1341). The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1332) between the second valid period (S1333) and the first valid period (S1331). When the performance button 109 is operated during the second valid period (S1361), a branch performance that incites whether or not to develop into the next performance is displayed (S1325). The oldest button image on the left among the five button images in the rendered area 675 is erased, the remaining four button images are moved one frame at a time to the left, and the reduced image of the white normal button image is placed in the rendered area. 675 and joins it (S1353).

Next, during the period of "the variation" (S1323), the second button preview performance is executed as the target button preview performance (S1329). Here, the red big chance button image is scheduled to be displayed, but since the big chance button image remains in the history, it is decided to execute the button introduction effect before S1329. As a button introduction effect, first the character image 672 appears (S1326), and after waiting near the effected area 675 (S1327), the character image 672 moves one by one above each button image and clicks any button. In addition to displaying a selection of whether or not to take out an image (S1328), the lamp of the production button 109 emits light in a light emission color corresponding to the color of the adjacent button image, and as the character image 672 moves, the light emission color of the production button 109 changes. The switching continues (S1342). When the character image 672 displays the selection of the red big chance button image, a sound effect is output to notify the decision of the button image (S1370). During the period of S1329, a red big chance button image is displayed, the remaining four button images are displayed in the rendered area 675, and a blank space is displayed in the position where the big chance button image was located (S1355 ). A character image 672 is displayed near the big chance button image. The effect button 109 enters the third valid period (S1335), and the lamp of the effect button 109 lights up in red (S1343). The effect button 109 is in an invalid period (S1334) between the third valid period (S1335) and the second valid period (S1333). When the performance button 109 is operated during the third valid period (S1362), a branch performance that incites whether or not to develop into the next performance is displayed (S1330). Among the five button images in the rendered area 675, the oldest button image on the left side is erased, the blank space and the remaining three button images are moved one frame at a time to the left, and the reduced image of the red big chance button image is It is moved to the right end of the rendered area 675 and added (S1356). After the third valid period, it becomes an invalid period (S1336), and the symbol variation shifts to the next variation (S1331). Note that as a modification of S1356, a predetermined default value may be set in the blank field and a white button image may be displayed.

Even if no operation input is made by the player during the first validity period (S1331), second validity period (S1333), and third validity period (S1335), the subsequent performance may be displayed. , the subsequent performance may be omitted and the remaining period may be replaced with an alternative performance. In the alternative performance, there is no display of a button image, and there is no development of the performance, that is, there is no performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. For example, when the button preview performance consists of a battle performance, if the performance button 109 is not operated, an alternate performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character are in an even fight with no winner or loser will be displayed as an alternative performance, and the button will remain as it is. The final judgment performance is reached without any image or subsequent performance being displayed. Furthermore, for example, as an alternative performance in place of the normal subsequent performance, it may be possible to switch to a performance in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or changed again.

As a first application example of the button preview performance of this embodiment, notification regarding the gaming state may be executed in accordance with the number of button images accumulated in the performance completed area 675 during a certain period. The notification regarding the gaming state may be, for example, notification of the presence or absence of a probability change in a state of latent probability change, which does not clearly indicate whether or not it is a probability change state. In addition, in a gaming machine that has a latent probability change state that ends with 150 symbol changes and a time-saving state that ends with 75 symbol changes, when the time-saving number reaches the 75th change, the easy-to-ball state changes as it is. Announcements may be made to incite whether or not to continue, that is, whether or not the state is in a stable state by asking whether it will be promoted to a stable state. In addition, in such a case, depending on the gaming state after the end of the special game (or the symbol that triggered the special game), the number of symbol changes after the end of the special game is the number of changes. To make it easier for button preview effects to occur regularly by referencing a specific table once or multiple times (the number of references is set to vary depending on the game state), and when button preview effects occur less frequently. By increasing the accumulation of button images according to the gaming state, the expectation level indicating the gaming state may be approached. In the easy-to-enter state, when the number of pending balls accumulates to 4, it becomes a super-shortening variation and the super-shortening variation often continues, and in the super-shortening variation, the frequency of execution of button effects tends to decrease, so it is executed as a so-called pre-reading effect. It may be configured to increase the number of rendered button images in the notification for inciting whether or not the probability change state is present by executing a button advance notice performance in which lines are repeated across multiple fluctuations.

As a second application example of the button preview performance of this embodiment, when the number of button images accumulated in the staged area 675 reaches a specified number, a button image with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as a blue chance button, is forcibly applied. The display may be changed to an image, and the display may be switched to a button image with a high expectation of a jackpot during the next button preview performance. However, the button preview performance that can be switched may be limited to the type or timing of a button preview performance that is displayed during reach. When a button preview performance using a chance button image is in a standby state, a predetermined flag may be set to preferentially refer to a performance determination table in which a button preview performance using a chance button image is likely to occur. When the number of button images accumulated in the staged area 675 reaches a specified number, and when the pending pattern includes a symbol variation with a high expectation of a jackpot or a symbol variation corresponding to a jackpot, the expectation of a jackpot is even higher. A button image (such as a big chance button image or a button image with a lever) may be made to stand by. As a modified example, a specific preview performance (for example, winning or losing during reach) can be determined based on the performance points earned for each button preview performance (high expectation buttons are easier to accumulate points), rather than the number of button preview performances. It may also be possible to promote the cut-in preview effect before the branch. A larger number of points, such as 1.2 to 3 times, may be obtained when the effect button 109 is pressed at a specific timing displayed on a predetermined indicator or the like. The points for presentation may be such that not only the pressing of the presentation button 109 but also the operation of another designated button such as the cross key 110 increases the points.

As a third application example of the button preview effect of this embodiment, a predetermined effect may be executed when the number of button images accumulated in the effected area 675 reaches a specified number. For example, a character image corresponding to each type of button image is set, and when the number is accumulated for each type of button image and a specified number is reached, a performance using the character image corresponding to that type of button image is executed. You can do it like this. The prescribed number may be set to be the same for each type of button image, or may be set to different numbers. When setting separate numbers, for example, 50 normal button images, 20 chance button images, 10 big chance button images, etc., the lower the jackpot expectation and the higher the frequency of appearance, the higher the specified number. You can.

For example, when the number of normal button images reaches a specified number, at least one of multiple types of effects such as playing a song related to the corresponding character, moving to a corresponding specific production stage, or announcing a pending jackpot. may be generated. However, depending on the performance situation of the symbol variation being executed, it may be made to occur from the next variation. For example, if the timing when the specified number is accumulated is during the jackpot symbol fluctuation, the execution of the predetermined performance may be canceled once. In that case, after one special game or a series of special games (consecutive games) is completed, you may restart from a state with 1 to 3 fewer than the specified number. ” cannot be implemented). When the number of chance button images reaches a predetermined number, the current game setting state may be suggested. When the number of big chance button images reaches a specified number, a one-time complete notification effect (for example, a performance that foretells that the button preview effect of the big chance button image will always be displayed when the next jackpot symbol changes) may be executed.

Note that when the production button 109 is repeatedly pressed, if the button image is a normal button image, the number of images corresponding to the number of times of repeated pressing or the number of a predetermined multiple may be accumulated. However, in the case of a chance button image or a big chance button image, the number may be fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 1 or 3) regardless of the repeated presses of the production button 109.

<Seventh Example>
This example will be explained below, focusing on the differences from the underlying technology, the first example, the second example, the third example, the fourth example, the fifth example, and the sixth example, and The explanation of the points to be omitted will be omitted.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of preview performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a "special performance pattern") is selected, a button image as an operation means image that imitates the appearance of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen. A preview performance (hereinafter referred to as "button preview performance") is displayed to prompt the player to input an operation. In the button preview effect, a predetermined effect can be executed when the operating means is operated within the valid period of the operation input, and an indicator indicating the passage of the valid period is displayed near the button image. As button images, multiple types of button images with different display modes, such as colors, patterns, shapes, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot expectation level is suggested depending on which color, pattern, or shape of the button image is displayed. have different heights. The button preview performance in this embodiment is based on the premise that when a player presses the performance button 109 during a predetermined valid period while the button image is displayed, a predetermined performance such as a win/fail branch performance or a reach performance can be executed. The "predetermined performance" here may be various kinds of reach performances, or may be other preview performances such as comment previews. Further, the "button preview effect" may be any of the various effects using button images shown in the first to sixth embodiments.

The effect determining means 303 can select one of the plurality of types of special effect patterns by lottery when a variable time variation pattern and a variable effect pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern are selected. When the special effect pattern is selected, the effect determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the button preview effect, the number of times it is displayed, the display timing, the type of button image, etc.

FIG. 47 schematically shows a screen example of a button preview effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 47(a) shows a standard indicator display mode. In principle, in normal times, a standard indicator in the form shown in the figure indicates the elapse of the effective period of the effect button 109. The standard indicator is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator, and expresses the passage of the validity period by displaying how the amount indicated by the indicator (meter display or gauge display) decreases from right to left. Here, when it is decided to execute the button preview performance of this embodiment, and when displaying a performance with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, in order to indicate the high expectation of a jackpot, In addition to setting a long validity period, the passage of the validity period is expressed using one of the following eight special indicators with different display modes. Not only the type of button image, but also the display mode of a special indicator can secondarily suggest the high degree of expectation of a jackpot. In addition, as a modification, the following 8 types of special indicators may be used to suggest a high degree of jackpot expectation without making the validity period longer than usual.

FIG. 47(b) schematically shows a first special example of the indicator. The indicator in the first special example is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that is longer than the standard indicator in FIG. 47(a), and its length suggests that the period of validity is longer than usual, or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Further, the length of the validity period may be changed depending on the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the length of the indicator of the first special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the validity period. Note that although the indicator of the first special case is longer than the standard indicator, the rate at which the value shown by the indicator decreases (or increases) is the same as that of the standard indicator, so the longer the indicator, the longer the validity period. be able to.

FIG. 47(c) schematically shows a second special example of the indicator. The indicator in the second special example is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that is thicker than the standard indicator in FIG. 47(a), and its thickness suggests that the validity period is longer than usual or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. Further, the length of the validity period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the thickness of the indicator of the second special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the validity period. In addition, since the indicator of the second special case is thicker than the standard indicator, the value indicated by the indicator decreases (or increases) slower than the standard indicator, indicating that the thicker the indicator, the longer the validity period. be able to.

FIG. 47(d) schematically shows a third special example of the indicator. The indicator in the third special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator with more indicators than the standard indicator in Figure 47(a), and the large number suggests that the validity period is longer than usual, or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. do. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed depending on the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the number of indicators in the third special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, since there are more indicators in the third special case than in the standard indicator, the rate at which the value indicated by the indicator decreases (or increases) is slower than in the standard indicator, indicating that the more indicators there are, the longer the validity period is. be able to. Note that as a performance to increase the number of indicators, a performance that accumulates (stocks) indicators may be performed in the previous symbol change or button preview performance.

FIG. 47(e) schematically shows a fourth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the fourth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator with a different color from the standard indicator in FIG. . Further, the length of the validity period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the color of the indicator of the fourth special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the validity period. Further, the color of the portion of the indicator indicating the remaining time may be changed depending on the length of time the player presses and holds the performance button 109 or the number of consecutive presses. Alternatively, the color of the portion of the indicator indicating the elapsed time may be changed depending on the length of time the player presses and holds the performance button 109 or the number of consecutive presses. For example, the color may change in the order of blue, green, yellow, and red, and the more the color changes, the longer the validity period is, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is higher. More likely to reach colors. Furthermore, it can be shown that the larger the number of colors or the wider the range of color change, the longer it takes for the change to take place, and therefore the validity period is correspondingly longer.

FIG. 48 schematically shows a screen example of a button preview effect in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 48(a) schematically shows a fifth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the fifth special case is also a horizontal bar-shaped indicator with a different color from the standard indicator in FIG. do. However, in the fourth special example, the colors change in the reverse order, for example, in the order of red, yellow, green, and blue, that is, the colors change from a color with a high jackpot expectation to a low one. Change the color of the elapsed time portion of the indicator in such order. The length of the validity period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation level, and the color of the indicator of the fifth special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the validity period. Further, the color of the portion of the indicator indicating the elapsed time may be changed depending on the length of time the player presses and holds the performance button 109 or the number of consecutive presses. The larger the number of colors or the wider the range of color change, the longer it takes to change, which can indicate that the validity period is correspondingly longer.

FIG. 48(b) schematically shows a sixth special example of the indicator. The sixth special example is a modification of the third special example. The indicator in the sixth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that has more indicators than the standard indicator in Figure 47(a), and the large number suggests that the validity period is longer than usual, or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. do. However, unlike the third special example, the number of indicators is indicated by a number such as "x3", and the number of indicators displayed at the same time is one. For example, if you use a number such as "x3" to indicate that there are three indicators, reduce the number each time you use one indicator. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the number of indicators in the sixth special example may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, since there are more indicators in the 6th special case than in the standard indicator, the rate at which the value indicated by the indicator decreases (or increases) is slower than in the standard indicator, indicating that the more indicators there are, the longer the validity period is. be able to. Note that as a performance to increase the number of indicators, a performance that accumulates (stocks) indicators may be performed in the previous symbol change or button preview performance.

FIG. 48(c) schematically shows a seventh special example of the indicator. The indicator in the seventh special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that increases and decreases in a different direction from the standard indicator in Figure 47(a), and depending on the direction, it suggests that the validity period is longer than usual or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. do. In the standard indicator, the value indicated by the indicator decreases from right to left, whereas in the indicator of the seventh special example, the value indicated by the indicator decreases from left to right.

FIG. 48(d) schematically shows an eighth special example of the indicator. The indicator in the eighth special case is a horizontal bar-shaped indicator that takes longer to digest than the standard indicator in FIG. suggests. However, the indicator itself has the same appearance as a standard indicator, and if the indicator finishes extinguishing without the player pressing the production button 109, the indicator begins extinguishing in the opposite direction, wrapping around (or reversing). There is. Further, the length of the valid period may be changed according to the number of stages of the jackpot expectation degree, and the number of times the indicator of the eighth special example can be turned back (or reversed) may also be changed according to the number of stages or the length of the valid period. In addition, since the indicator of the 8th special case takes longer to digest than the standard indicator, the rate at which the value indicated by the indicator decreases (or increases) is slower than that of the standard indicator, so the longer the digestion time of the indicator, the more effective it is. It can be shown that the period is long.

In the first embodiment described above, an example has been described in which the operation status is displayed using numbers, letters, indicators, etc. In a modified example, multiple objects composed of figures, etc. (one object may correspond to one object per operation, or the number of operations may be determined for each object display mode by making the colors and shapes different) The operation status may be displayed in a manner in which the number of operations indicated by the number of operations (which may be different) increases or the number of remaining operations decreases.

<Eighth Example>
The present embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to seventh embodiments, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the eighth embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to seventh embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of fluctuating performance pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "special performance pattern") is selected, the operation on the performance button 109 is enabled during one symbol variation based on the special performance pattern. A button effect including the period (hereinafter also referred to as "button operation valid period") is generated at least once (in the embodiment, multiple times). In at least one button performance among the plurality of button performances, a post-operation performance is immediately output when a predetermined operation condition for the performance button 109 is satisfied. In addition, in the at least one button performance described above, depending on the remaining time of the button operation valid period when the button operation is input, the relationship will be related to a specific performance to be executed in the subsequent variable performance (hereinafter also referred to as "subsequent performance"). Predetermined performance elements (hereinafter also referred to as "accumulation elements") are accumulated. The accumulation element is a performance element (for example, an image related to the content of the subsequent performance) for making the subsequent performance in a manner that indicates that the expectation of a jackpot is high, or that the expectation of a jackpot is high. This is a performance element for executing a subsequent performance that notifies the user. In the subsequent performance, content corresponding to the accumulated elements accumulated up to that point is displayed.

Specifically, the special performance pattern includes a predetermined performance that includes a valid button operation period (in the embodiment, a pseudo continuous variation performance and a button performance), and an operation on the performance button 109 is performed during the valid period of the predetermined performance. is input, it is determined that a predetermined element for executing a subsequent effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot is accumulated based on the remaining period of the valid period. The effect display control means 305 displays the preceding effect when the effect determining means 303 decides to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and when the operation on the effect button 109 is input during the valid period of the preceding effect, the effect display control means 305 displays the preceding effect. A subsequent performance corresponding to the accumulated elements is displayed based on the remaining period of the validity period.

The subsequent performance in this embodiment includes a timer preview that uses a timer image to suggest the timing at which a chance up (a notice indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than the normal performance, a promotion performance, etc.) will be displayed. When a button operation is performed in a button performance, the remaining time of the button operation valid period in the button performance is accumulated as timer time, in other words, it is added to the timer time. The timer time is the time that is subtracted in the timer notice until it reaches 0, and becomes longer according to the remaining time.

FIG. 49 schematically shows the presentation process in the special presentation of the eighth embodiment. The presentation process of the special presentation is defined by the above-mentioned special presentation pattern. The special performance of the eighth embodiment is a performance that is displayed during one pattern variation execution, and includes a pseudo-continuous variation performance (hereinafter also referred to as "pseudo-continuous performance") of the decorative symbols 506. The pseudo-continuous effect is a pseudo-continuous display in which a plurality of decorative symbols 506 (including pseudo-continuous symbols described below) are displayed as if they were temporarily stopped (also referred to as a temporary stop) in one symbol variation. This is a production that makes it look like it was actually executed. The temporary stop may be a state in which the decorative pattern 506 or the pseudo-continuous pattern does not stand completely still and is slightly swaying. The pseudo sequence in the special effect of the eighth embodiment includes two temporary stops, and the variable effect from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 506 to the first temporary stop is also called a "pseudo 1 effect", and from the first temporary stop to the first temporary stop. The variable performance up to the second temporary stop is also called a "pseudo 2 performance", and the variable performance from the second temporary stop until a reach is formed and the timer notice is started is also called a "pseudo 3 performance".

The pseudo 1 effect includes the button 1 effect which is the first button effect, the pseudo 2 effect includes the button 2 effect which is the second button effect, and the pseudo 3 effect includes the button 3 effect which is the third button effect. Including production. Each button performance includes content that encourages whether or not symbol fluctuations will continue, and also includes content that urges the player to operate the performance button 109.

For example, the button performance is a pattern that shows the continuation of pattern fluctuation (for example, "NEXT") between the decorative patterns 506 (also called "reaching patterns") that are maxed out by one button operation, and is a pattern that shows "pseudo It may be an effect (so to speak, a one-shot effect) that encourages whether or not the continuous pattern will stop. Further, the button effect may be an effect that displays a message such as "defeat XXX enemies and grab the NEXT" and encourages repeated hits on the effect button 109 (so to speak, a continuous hit effect). Further, the button effect may be an effect (so to speak, a long press effect) that displays a message such as "Collect energy in the NETXT logo (pseudo-continuous pattern logo)" to encourage a long press on the effect button 109. Further, the button performance may be such that the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped at a timing indicating that the result of the operation on the performance button 109 is successful, or at the end of the valid period of operation on the performance button 109.

In the special effect of the eighth embodiment, after the pseudo continuous pattern stops, the effect mode is changed based on the button operation to absorb the difference between the variable display time of the special symbol and the duration of the variable effect. The decorative pattern 506 does not wait for the fluctuation of the fluctuation, but immediately displays the decoration for a predetermined period of time (display of a pseudo-continuous pattern, display of a temporary stop, display of content indicating continuation of the pattern fluctuation, etc.). The fluctuation of the symbol 506 is resumed. In other words, the earlier the input of the button operation is, the earlier the display of the result of the button effect is, the earlier the multiple types of effects in one variation are displayed. As shown in FIG. 49, in the special performance of the eighth embodiment, the super reach performance as the above-mentioned subsequent performance is executed after three pseudo series. The super reach performance includes a timer notice that starts a timer (for example, a countdown) when the super reach develops, and displays an increased chance when the timer reaches "0". In addition, in this embodiment, an example was explained in which the timer effect starts after the reach is formed, but even in a variable effect pattern in which a "pseudo 3 effect" is performed, if the timer effect is started while the pseudo 2 effect is being executed, or when the pseudo 3 effect is executed, The timer notice may be started while the performance is being executed and before reaching the reach.

FIG. 49(a) shows that the performance button 109 is pressed at the latest timing in each of the button 1 performance, button 2 performance, and button 3 performance, that is, at the expiration of the button operation validity period of the performance button 109 (just before expiration). It shows the length of the timer notice (or when the long press operation condition of the production button 109 or the number of consecutive presses condition is satisfied). Further, FIG. 49(b) shows the length of the timer notice when the effect button 109 is pressed at the earliest timing in each of the button 1 effect, button 2 effect, and button 3 effect. The timer notice of the special effect shown in FIG. 49(b) is based on the timer notice of the special effect shown in FIG. In this example, the length is approximately equal to the button operation valid period). In the example of FIG. 49, in order to simplify the explanation, it is shown that the button effects are executed from the beginning of the pseudo 1 effect, pseudo 2 effect, and pseudo 3 effect, but the other effects in each pseudo variation are shown as being executed from the beginning. The button 1 effect, the button 2 effect, and the button 3 effect may be executed after the execution of the preview effect or at the same time (described later with reference to FIG. 50).

The performance display control means 305 displays the time value of the timer (i.e., the time from the start of the timer when the super reach develops until the chance up display) along with the fact that the timer is on standby from the start of the special performance to the end of the pseudo 3 performance. It is displayed on the effect display device 60. The timer time value at the start of the timer display (that is, the initial value of the timer time value) is set to the time value when the button operation is the slowest, as shown in FIG. 49(a).

The effect display control means 305 (or the effect determining means 303, the same applies hereinafter) displays the remaining time of the button operation valid period and the previous timer time value when displaying the result of the button effect (for example, when displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern in FIG. 49). Add to. In this way, by increasing the displayed timer time value, it appears that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased. Further, depending on the button operation mode accepted in each of the button 1 performance, button 2 performance, and button 3 performance, it becomes easy to change the timer time value that can be stocked. For example, it is easier to stock up more time with a single press effect than with a continuous press effect or a long press effect. A button operation mode may be determined.

FIG. 50 is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 50(a) shows the display timing and display mode of the button image 500. FIG. 50(b) shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of performance periods constituting the special performance. FIG. 50(c) shows the output period, timing, and length of the audio production. FIG. 50(d) shows the lighting timing, length, lighting color, or lighting mode of a lamp device (also referred to as a "button lamp") provided in the vicinity of the production button 109 on the production button 109 body or casing. show. FIG. 50(e) shows the timing and length of the valid operation period for the effect button 109. FIG. 50(f) shows the operation timing and operation mode for the effect button 109. In addition, in the explanation in this figure, in order to simplify the explanation, the button effect will not be a repeated press effect or a long press effect, but will be explained using a button effect that progresses with a single button operation.

In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 50(b), pseudo 1 effect in S1400 is first started. Although not shown, during the execution period of pseudo 1 to pseudo 3 effects (that is, the period before the start of the timer notice), it is displayed that the timer is on standby (specifically, the timer image and timer time value indicating that it is on standby). indicate. In addition, the timer standby display may start after the pseudo 2 effect, or may start after the button operation input of the button effect executed during the fluctuation, and if any of the button 1 effect to button 3 effect is successful. It may be started when displaying results showing.

During the pseudo 1 effect, a button 1 effect including the button operation validity period is displayed (S1401). When the button 1 effect is started, button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1420) to a valid state (S1421). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1440), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1430). In the case of a variation pattern in which the expectation of a jackpot is high, the button lamp may be emitted in a manner (red, blinking, etc.) indicating that the expectation is high. Furthermore, in the case of a variation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, the button image may be displayed in a special manner, and the button lamp may be caused to emit light in a manner that matches the button image. For example, when displaying a red button image as a special mode, a button lamp may be made to emit red light. Further, when displaying a button image with a giraffe pattern as a special mode, the button lamp may emit light in a mode combining orange and yellow.

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 1 performance (in other words, while the button operation validity period remains) (S1450). At the on-edge of the button operation (that is, when the input of the button operation is detected by the sensor), the valid period of the button operation ends and the button lamp is turned off. When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound indicating that the button operation has been accepted (S1460).

In addition, when a button operation is input in the button 1 effect, the effect display control means 305 immediately displays the decorative pattern 506 without executing the effect for length adjustment, such as a standby display due to a longer-than-normal shaking fluctuation of the decorative pattern 506. 506 and a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed (S1402). Furthermore, the effect display control means 305 increases the time value of the waiting timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. The audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined addition sound to notify that the timer time value has been added (S1461). Note that although not shown, an image display effect regarding the addition of the timer time value or an effect using a decorative lamp may be performed.

The addition sound may be switched to a special sound indicating that the longer the time added to the timer time value, that is, the longer the remaining time of the button operation valid period, the higher the expectation level. Furthermore, a special sound effect may be output when the total time added to the timer time value (the total of three button performances) exceeds a reference value. For example, when the additional time reaches 3 seconds, 6 seconds, or 9 seconds, a special sound indicating an increased chance may be output.

After the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo continuous pattern are temporarily stopped (for example, after 1 second of oscillating fluctuation display), the variation of the decorative pattern 506 is immediately resumed, and the transition is made to pseudo 2 performance (S1403). During the pseudo 2 effect, a button 2 effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1404). When the button 2 effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1422) to the valid state (S1423). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1441), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1431).

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 2 performance (in other words, while the button operation validity period remains) (S1451). At the on-edge of a button operation, the button operation valid period ends and the button lamp is turned off. When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1462). The effect display control means 305 immediately displays the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo-continuous pattern (S1405), and increases the time value of the waiting timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. The audio control means 306 outputs the addition sound (S1463).

After the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo-continuous pattern, the variation of the decorative pattern 506 is immediately resumed, and a transition is made to pseudo 3 performance (S1406). During the pseudo 3 effect, a button 3 effect including the button operation valid period is displayed (S1407). When the button 3 effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1424) to the valid state (S1425). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1442), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1432).

The player inputs a button operation before the end of the button 3 effect (in other words, while the button operation validity period remains) (S1452). At the on-edge of the button operation, the valid period of the button operation ends and the button lamp is turned off. When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1464). The effect display control means 305 displays a development suggestion effect indicating the result of whether or not it will develop into super reach (S1408), and increases the time value of the waiting timer according to the remaining time of the button operation valid period. . The audio control means 306 outputs the addition sound (S1465).

Subsequently, the effect display control means 305 displays the super reach effect as the subsequent effect (S1409). The effect display control means 305 starts the timer notice in the super reach effect, and continues the timer notice until the timer time value (initial value + increment) accumulated between the button 1 effect and the button 3 effect has elapsed. Display it (S1410). The timer notice may be content that suggests when a chance-up effect, such as a character cut-in or a battle, will occur. The performance display control means 305 displays the winning/losing branch in the super reach performance after the timer notice ends.

FIG. 51 is also a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the eighth embodiment. Similar to FIG. 50(b), this figure shows the timing, length, and content of a plurality of performance periods constituting the special performance. The effects from S1400 to S1409 in the figure correspond to the effects from S1400 to S1409 in 50(b).

This figure shows the performance process when the player does not input any button operation, and corresponds to the slowest pattern shown in FIG. 49(a). In the figure, each of the button 1 effect (S1401), button 2 effect (S1404), and button 3 effect (S1407) is displayed for the maximum time, so the timer time value does not increase and remains at its initial value. Therefore, the display time of the timer notice (S1410) in the super reach effect (S1409) is shorter than the timer notice in FIG. 50(b).

However, the time of the entire special performance is the same in FIGS. 50 and 51, and the end timing of the timer notice on the time axis of the entire special performance is also the same in FIGS. 50 and 51. That is, in the example of FIG. 50, since the button operation was input before the button operation valid period elapsed, the remaining time of the button operation valid period was added to the timer time value. As a result, the timer notice shown in FIG. 50 is started at an earlier timing than the timer notice shown in FIG. 51, and continues for a longer time.

Next, an example of a special performance pattern lottery process (performance content determination process) by the performance determining means 303 in this embodiment will be explained. The performance determining means 303 first executes a scenario lottery. In the scenario lottery, a production pattern (preliminary production that occurs during each pseudo variation) that determines the number of pseudo consecutive runs + timer notice is created according to the validity judgment results, symbol judgment results, and fluctuation pattern judgment results sent from the main board 200. ``scenarios'' that define combinations can be selected by lottery. When selecting a scenario that specifies the number of pseudo consecutive runs + the presence of a timer notice, the effect determining means 303 determines (a) the type of reach effect, and (b) the type and number of chance-up effects during the reach effect (target of the timer notice). It is further determined by lottery which of a plurality of patterns of the extended time of the timer notice due to the advance of the reach effect) and (c) the reach effect can appear. Note that the number of pseudo effects (or the number of temporary stops may also be used) may also be determined by a separate lottery after the scenario lottery. Further, the plurality of patterns of the extension time of the timer notice may include +8 seconds and +12 seconds (or an insertion effect 1 of 8 seconds and an insertion effect 2 of 12 seconds).

When a scenario with two pseudo performances is determined and the pattern of the extension time of the timer notice is determined to be "+8 seconds", the performance determining means 303 selects the button 1 performance of the pseudo 1 performance and the button 2 performance of the pseudo 2 performance. You may select a button effect that allows the timer time value to be increased by 8 seconds in total. Specifically, when the shortest time for both repeated presses and long presses among the button operation modes is set to 1 second, a continuous press effect in which the button operation validity period of the effect button 109 is 5 seconds is determined as the button 1 effect, and a button 2 effect is determined as the button 1 effect. As a result, a long-press effect may be determined in which the button operation validity period of the effect button 109 is 7 seconds. When the player operates the timer in a manner that allows 8 seconds to be added to the timer time when executing the effect, control is performed to execute insertion effect 1 when executing the reach effect, and if it is not possible to add 8 seconds, , by delaying the playback time and frame switching timing of a predetermined performance image (one or more looped images) during the reach performance, to absorb and digest the time until the chance-up performance that is subject to the timer notice. It is composed of

Generally, the longer the time measured in the timer notice (ie, the timer time value), the higher the expectation of a jackpot. According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the eighth embodiment, subsequent performances are executed in advance according to the timing of button operations in multiple button performances, and the timer notice time is extended by the amount of advance, so that the expectation of a jackpot can be increased. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the score is higher, and the interest in the game can be increased. Furthermore, it is possible to encourage the player to actively input button operations, in other words, to actively participate in the button performance.

A first modification will be explained. The effect control means 304 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a function (auto button function, herein referred to as "automatic operation means") of automatically inputting an operation on the effect button 109 during the valid button operation period according to settings by the player. You may prepare. In this case, if automatic operation is enabled, the operation will be completed much faster than if the player manually presses the button, and the timer time value may be longer than the developer expected. be. Therefore, during the special performance (particularly the button performance) to which the timer time value is added in the eighth embodiment, the performance control means 304 disables the automatic operation function regardless of the setting by the player, and button operation may be requested. According to this aspect, the benefit of extending the timer time value can be provided to the player who actually operates the performance button 109 with his or her own hand and participates in the button performance. Note that the effect display control means 305 of this modification prevents the player from manually operating the button by displaying an image (such as a message or icon that says "Auto button disabled") indicating that the automatic operation has been disabled. You can also encourage them.

A second modification will be explained. As the button operation valid time in the button presentation, a time corresponding to the operation mode may be set. For example, the valid button operation time may be set to 3 seconds for a button presentation that requires a single press, 5 seconds for a button presentation that requires repeated presses, and 5 seconds for a button presentation that requires a long press. If the shortest time for each of the button operation modes, repeated presses and long presses, is set to 1 second, a total of 12 seconds can be shortened by three button effects. Therefore, three patterns of reach effects including timer notices are memorized (for example, pattern A where the timer notice is the base time, pattern B where the timer notice is the base time + 8 seconds, pattern C where the timer notice is the base time + 12 seconds), and the effects are displayed. The control means 305 may select a reach performance pattern (for example, any one of the above A to C) in which the timer notice time is increased by the time shortened in the button performance.

As another aspect, the effect display control means 305 executes one reach effect in which the timer notice is set as the base time, and further inserts a timer notice of 4 seconds + 1 second for time absorption (e.g. next preview, background effect). etc.) may be performed once or twice depending on the length of time shortened in the button performance, thereby absorbing the time reduction in the button performance. Note that the value added to the timer time value at the time of button operation input may be a rounded value. For example, in a button performance (repeat press) with a button operation validity period of "5 seconds", if the target number of button presses is achieved "3.2 seconds" after the start (remaining time is "1.8 seconds"), the timer The time value may be set to "+2 seconds". In this case, the difference of "0.2 seconds" may be absorbed by shortening the shaking fluctuation in the pseudo continuous.

A third modification will be explained. In the above example, the timer time value was added for each pseudo-sequence (button effect), but as a step-up button effect, the button operation valid period is added for each pseudo-sequence (button effect), and the last button effect ( For example, the remaining time of the button operation valid period (for example, button 3 effect) may be added to the timer time value.

FIG. 52 schematically shows a button effect of a modified example. 52(a) shows the button 1 effect of the pseudo 1 effect 730, FIG. 52(b) shows the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732, and FIG. 52(c) shows the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734. ing. Each button rendering includes a button image 500 and a valid period indicator 736. Further, the remaining time 738 for each button performance indicates the remaining time of the valid button operation period at the time of button operation input (in the case of repeated presses or long presses, when the goal is achieved). The effect display control means 305 shortens the length display of the remaining time 738 as the button effect continues, in other words, as the button operation effective period decreases.

The effect display control means 305 of this modification sets the button operation valid period in the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732 to a value obtained by adding the remaining time 738 in the button 1 effect of the pseudo 1 effect 730 to a predetermined initial value. do. Further, the effect display control means 305 sets the button operation valid period in the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734 to a value obtained by adding the remaining time 738 in the button 2 effect of the pseudo 2 effect 732 to a predetermined initial value. Then, the effect display control means 305 adds the remaining time 738 in the button 3 effect of the pseudo 3 effect 734 to the timer time value.

It should be noted that the longer the remaining time of the button operation valid period, the longer the display (remaining time) corresponding to the time added to the timer time value becomes, and as a result, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, the effect display control means 305 may change the appearance (color, pattern, etc.) of the remaining time 738 depending on the length of the remaining time 738. For example, a first threshold, a second threshold, and a third threshold are set in stages from the shortest remaining time, and when the remaining time exceeds the first threshold, the effect display control means 305 changes the remaining time 738 from the initial mode of blue. The remaining time 738 may be changed from green to green, and when the remaining time becomes equal to or greater than a second threshold, the remaining time 738 may be changed from green to orange, and when the remaining time becomes equal to or greater than a third threshold, the remaining time 738 may be changed from orange to red. Further, when the variable performance results in a jackpot, the performance display control means 305 displays the remaining time 738 in a special mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating a jackpot with a predetermined probability (in the case of winning the performance lottery). You may let them.

A fourth modification will be explained. As already described in the eighth embodiment, the effect display control means 305 displays the timer time value when performing the pseudo 1 to 3 pseudo effects. Further, in the aspect of the third modification, the timer time value is not added to the pseudo groups, and the timer time value is displayed as the initial value (in other words, the base time). In either embodiment, the initial value is displayed in advance before the start of the reach effect (the start of timer effect timing), so if the initial value of the timer time value is short, the player The preview time is short, which means that it is easy to expect things to go wrong, which may reduce the interest of the special effects. Therefore, the performance display control means 305 displays a performance in which the initial value of the timer time value (that is, the value before addition) is determined at a timing after the end of the pseudo-continuous performance and before the reach performance (before the super reach development). Good too. In other words, such a presentation process may be defined in a special presentation pattern.

The effect display control means 305 of this modification may execute a button effect that determines the initial value of the timer time value in the development promotion effect before the reach effect, for example, in S1408 of FIG. 50(b). The fourth button effect may be executed by pressing the button. When the fourth button performance is a one-press performance, the performance display control means 305 creates a performance in which the initial value of the timer time value fluctuates like a roulette, and the initial value of the timer time value is displayed when the button is pressed. May be executed. Further, when the fourth button effect is a number of press effect, the effect display control means 305 inputs the number of button operations corresponding to the number of digits of the time, and gradually changes the time of each digit according to the button operation. You may execute the effect to be displayed. Further, it may be configured to execute a performance that notifies the initial value of the timer time value immediately after the start of the ready-to-win performance.

Furthermore, when the fourth button effect is a long-press effect, the effect display control means 305 counts up the initial value of the timer time value according to the length of time that the effect button 109 is held down within the valid period. You may execute the effect to be displayed. Furthermore, when the fourth button effect is a repeated press effect, the effect display control means 305 increases the initial value of the timer time value by a predetermined unit amount in accordance with the repeated presses (for example, the number of presses of the effect button 109). You may let them. Alternatively, a valid period of 10 seconds may be displayed, and if the repeated hits are successful after 10 seconds have elapsed (for example, if the number of presses of the production button 109 is a predetermined number or more), the initial value of the timer time value may be increased. .

Note that the effect display control means 305 causes the value to be added to the initial value of the timer time value, that is, the value accumulated in the Button 1 effect to Button 3 effect, to be displayed on standby near the image indicating that the timer is being prepared. You can. Then, when the initial value of the timer time value is determined or immediately before the timer starts counting, the additional amount may be added to the initial value and displayed.

Furthermore, when determining (displaying) the initial value of the timer time value, the effect display control means 305 multiplies the timer (increases the number of timer images) in response to the press of the effect button 109. Good too. The multiplying timer is a timer that targets a later notice than the timer notice based on the initially displayed timer. For example, if the effect display control means 305 initially displays a 20-second timer and generates a new timer for a 5-second notice, it may display a 25-second timer as a new timer (not the same as the original timer notice). (simultaneous start) may be displayed. Alternatively, a 5-second timer (starting after the initial timer notice ends) may be displayed as a new timer.

A fifth modification will be explained. In the above embodiment, when the timer time value reaches 0 in the timer notice, an increased chance is displayed. As a modification, the performance display control means 305 may notify a jackpot when the timer time value reaches 0, or the content of the performance may be specified in a special performance pattern. In addition, when notifying a jackpot before the timer time value reaches 0, the performance display control means 305 may promote the jackpot when the timer time value reaches 0 (promotion from a normal jackpot to a jackpot with probability variation, or the number of prize balls). Promotion to a jackpot with a larger expected value, promotion to a jackpot with a longer duration of the easy-to-enter state, etc.) may be displayed. You can.

A sixth modification will be explained. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, a first special performance pattern that extends the timer time value according to the button operation timing (in other words, brings forward the start of the subsequent performance) is a special performance pattern that includes a button performance and a timer notice. and a second special effect pattern in which the timer time value is not increased regardless of the button operation timing. The performance determining means 303 may select the first special performance pattern and the second special performance pattern at a predetermined probability (by lottery) according to the lottery result of the main board 200. The first special effect pattern specifies that the result of the timer notice is a success (improved chance), while the second special effect pattern specifies the content that the result of the timer notice indicates a failure (no chance increased). Good too.

<Ninth Example>
The present embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to eighth embodiments, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the ninth embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to eighth embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of fluctuating performance pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "special performance pattern") is selected, a preceding performance including a button operation valid period during one symbol fluctuation based on the special performance pattern. to occur. In the advance performance, a performance development suggestion image is displayed by pressing the performance button 109. The performance development suggestion image may be an image that suggests that a pseudo continuous performance will be performed. In addition, the performance development suggestion image may be an image that suggests the result of a win/fail judgment or the content of the performance, for example, it suggests the occurrence of a jackpot, a loss, a pseudo continuous performance, a chance-up performance, etc. as a result of roulette. It may be an image in a mode where the Then, depending on the operation mode of the performance button 109 at the time when the performance development suggestion image is displayed, the execution pattern of the performance contents after development and after development (also referred to as "subsequent performance") is changed.

Specifically, the special effect pattern includes a preceding effect that includes a button operation valid period, in which a special image suggesting the development of the effect is displayed when an operation on the effect button 109 is input during that period. It is determined that the performance will be performed. Further, the special effect pattern is defined to vary the content of the subsequent effect indicating the expectation level of the jackpot depending on the operation mode input to the effect button 109 during the display period of the special image. The effect display control means 305 displays the preceding effect when the effect determining means 303 decides to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and when an operation on the effect button 109 is input during the valid button operation period in the preceding effect. display a special image. The effect display control means 305 displays subsequent effects with different contents in accordance with the operation mode input to the effect button 109 during the display period of the special image.

Hereinafter, the performance executed based on the special performance pattern, which includes the preceding performance and the subsequent performance, will also be referred to as a "special performance." FIG. 53 schematically shows an example of screen transition of special effects in the ninth embodiment. Particularly, FIG. 53 shows the screen transition of the button effect related part in the special effect. First, in the foreground effect 710 corresponding to the preceding effect described above, a button image 500 is displayed as a button effect to prompt the player to operate the effect button 109. A message to the player such as "Press the button!" may also be displayed. When the effect button 109 is pressed in the foreground effect 710, as shown in the foreground effect 711, the symbol variation is temporarily stopped, and the developed symbol (corresponding to the above-mentioned special image) is temporarily stopped as the central symbol. The development pattern may be a pseudo continuous pattern, or may be a performance development image related to reach or the like (for example, a pattern showing development to super reach).

In the special effect pattern of the embodiment, a button operation can be accepted even during the display of the developed symbol shown in the foreground effect 711 (for example, during a pseudo continuous pattern temporary stop); in other words, the button operation valid period continues. Then, the subsequent performance branches depending on the operation mode for the performance button 109 while the developed symbol is being displayed, and in this example, it branches to one of a post-development performance 712a, a post-development performance 712b, and a post-development performance 712c.

For example, (1) if no operation is input to the performance button 109 while displaying the developed symbols, the process moves to the post-development performance 712a including a single-press performance of the performance button 109. (2) If the button operation for the production button 109 is input again while the development symbol is displayed (or if the button operation is input a predetermined number of times or more as a continuous press operation), the post-development production including the continuous press production of the production button 109 712b. (3) If a long press operation on the production button 109 is input while the developed symbol is displayed (or if the press of the production button 109 is continued from the time the foreground production 710 is displayed), the long press production on the production button 109 is included. The process moves to the post-development production 712c. Note that the condition for transition to the post-development performance 712a (1) may be satisfied when both the transition condition (2) and the transition condition (3) are not achieved.

Further, the process of satisfying each of the transition conditions (2) and (3) may be displayed on the screen. For example, if a button press operation is received while the pseudo continuous pattern "NEXT" in the foreground effect 711 is temporarily stopped, the font color of "NEXT" will be changed to a different color one by one each time the button is pressed. It may also suggest a transition to the effect 712b. In addition, if a long button press operation is received while the pseudo continuous pattern "NEXT" in the foreground effect 711 is temporarily stopped, the font color of "NEXT" will gradually change from the bottom to the top as the button is pressed for a long time. This may indicate a transition to the post-development presentation 712c. On the other hand, when the continuous hit effect of the post-development effect 712b and the long-press effect of the post-development effect 712c are used as back button effects, instead of changing the display mode of the pseudo continuous pattern "NEXT", the lighting mode of the button lamp is changed. A process in which each of the transition conditions (2) and (3) are satisfied may be presented depending on the manner in which the transition conditions (2) and (3) are satisfied.

The one-press performance of the post-development performance 712a is a performance in which the result is displayed by pressing the performance button 109 once. The displayed result may be, for example, a result of a win/fail judgment, a temporary stop of a pseudo-continuous pattern, or a roulette result (which may include a jackpot, a loss, a pseudo-continuous pattern, a performance development, etc.). The repeated hit performance of the post-development performance 712b is a performance in which the result is displayed by repeatedly hitting the performance button 109. For example, the repeated hit effect may be an effect that requires a button to be pressed a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined time limit, and when achieved, announces a jackpot, or may be an effect that temporarily stops the pseudo continuous symbol. Good too. The long-press performance of the post-development performance 712c is a performance in which the result is displayed by a long-press operation of the performance button 109. For example, a long-press effect may be an effect in which the longer the button is pressed, the more energy accumulates in the energy gauge, and when the energy gauge is full, a jackpot is announced. It may be an effect that stops the event.

FIG. 54 is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production according to the ninth embodiment. 54(a) to 54(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This figure shows the production process from the foreground production 710 in FIG. 53 to the post-development production 712a. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the foreground effect in S1500 is first started. In the foreground effect, a button effect including the valid period of button operation is displayed (S1501, foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1510) to a valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1511). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1530), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1520).

The player inputs a button operation (here, presses once) while the button effect is displayed (S1540). When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1550). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the developing pattern (S1502, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as a back button effect even after the button operation input in S1540 (second valid period in S1512). The effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to continue emitting white light even after the button image 500 is hidden. In addition, as a modified example, as a continuation mode of the valid button operation period, a very short button operation invalid period is provided between the first valid period and the second valid period, and the button operation valid period continues for the most part. It may be configured as follows.

In the example shown in the figure, the player does not operate the production button 109 while the developing symbols are temporarily stopped (that is, within the second valid period). The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the display of the developed symbol is finished (S1503). The effect display control means 305 displays a one-press effect as a button effect in the post-development effect (post-development effect 712a in FIG. 53) (S1504). When the one-press effect is started, button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1513) to a valid state (S1514). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1531), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1521).

The player inputs a button operation (here, one press) while the one-press effect is displayed (S1541). When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1551). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and displays the effect resulting from the button operation (S1505). In the one-press performance in the post-development performance, when a button operation is performed once, the button operation switches from a valid state to an invalid state (S1515).

FIG. 55 is also a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the ninth embodiment. 55(a) to 55(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This figure shows the production process from the foreground production 710 in FIG. 53 to the post-development production 712b. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the foreground effect in S1600 is first started. In the foreground effect, a button effect including the valid period of button operation is displayed (S1601, foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1610) to a valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1611). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1630), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1620).

The player inputs a button operation (here, presses once) while the button effect is displayed (S1640). When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1650). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the developing pattern (S1602, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as a back button effect even after the button operation input in S1640 (second valid period in S1612). The effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to continue emitting white light even after the button image 500 is hidden.

In the example shown in the figure, the player presses the production button 109 once while the developing symbols are temporarily stopped (that is, within the second valid period) (S1641). Note that while the player repeatedly presses the performance button 109, both button operations in S1640 and S1641 may be input. When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1651). The sound effect of S1651 is different from the operation sound of S1650 in at least one of the size, pitch, and tone in order to emphasize that it is a back button, but as a modified example, the sound effect is the same as the operation sound of S1650. But that's fine. Note that, as in the above-mentioned modification, a very short button operation invalidation period (or a valid period but a period in which effect switching is disabled) is placed between the first operation validity period and the second operation validity period. If this method is adopted, even if button operations S1640 and S1641 are performed consecutively in an extremely short period, sound effects S1650 and S1651 will occur in the overlapping period, and a player who does not know the back button effect will be unable to stop the developing symbols. It is also possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that "the special effect sound (S1651) has been played (there may be high expectations for a jackpot)". In addition, in order to avoid a similar problem, when the button operation condition is satisfied in the second operation period in this example, the effect (sound effect S1651, etc.) is not executed immediately after the condition is satisfied, but is made to wait for a predetermined period. , the effect may be executed after waiting until a specific timing.

The effect display control means 305 displays a post-development effect after the display of the developed symbol is finished (S1603). The performance display control means 305 displays a repeated hit performance as a button performance in the post-development performance (post-development performance 712b in FIG. 53) (S1604). When the continuous hit effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1613) to the valid state (S1614). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1631), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1621). Note that the continuous press effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1604, S1614) are longer than the single press effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1504, S1514 in FIG. 54).

The player inputs a button operation (here, a repeated-hit operation) while the repeated-hit effect is being displayed (S1642). When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1652). When the goal in the repeated press effect (for example, pressing the button a predetermined number of times or more) is achieved, the effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and displays the effect resulting from the button operation (S1605). ). Then, the button operation is switched from a valid state to an invalid state (S1615).

FIG. 56 is also a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production of the ninth embodiment. 56(a) to 56(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This diagram shows the production process from the foreground production 710 to the post-development production 712c in FIG. 53. In the special effect illustrated in this figure, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the foreground effect in S1700 is first started. In the foreground effect, a button effect including the valid period of button operation is displayed (S1701, foreground effect 710 in FIG. 53). When the button effect is started, the button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1710) to a valid state (first valid period in the figure) (S1711). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1730), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1720).

The player inputs a button operation (here, a long press) while the button effect is displayed (S1740). When a button operation input is detected, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1750). The effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500 and temporarily stops the developing pattern (S1702, front effect 711 in FIG. 53). In the special effect illustrated in this figure, the button operation valid period continues as a back button effect even after the button operation input in S1740 (second valid period in S1712). The effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to continue emitting white light even after the button image 500 is hidden.

In the example shown in the figure, the player continues to press the production button 109 (that is, presses it for a long time) even while the developing symbols are temporarily stopped (that is, within the second valid period). When the condition for long-pressing the button (for example, the button-pressing state continues for a predetermined period of time or more) is satisfied during the second validity period, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1751). The sound effect of S1751 is different from the operation sound of S1750 in at least one of the size, pitch, and tone in order to emphasize that it is a back button, but as a modified example, the sound effect is the same as the operation sound of S1750. But that's fine.

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after the display of the developed symbol is finished (S1703). The effect display control means 305 displays a long press effect as a button effect in the post-development effect (post-development effect 712c in FIG. 53) (S1704). Note that the condition for transition to the post-development performance including the long-press performance may be that the performance button 109 continues to be pressed for the entire second valid period. Alternatively, the total amount of time the production button 109 is pressed during the second valid period may be equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. In the latter case, the effect display control means 305 may display an effect in which energy gradually accumulates in the energy gauge as the button is continued to be pressed during the second valid period. Furthermore, if the total amount of time that the performance button 109 is pressed during the second valid period is less than the above threshold value, the process may proceed to a post-development performance 712b that includes a continuous hit performance.

When the long-press effect is started, button operation is switched from an invalid state (S1713) to a valid state (S1714). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1731), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1721). Note that the long press effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1704, S1714) are longer than the one press effect display period and its button operation valid period (S1504, S1514 in FIG. 54).

The player inputs a button operation (here, a long press operation) while the long press effect is being displayed (S1741). When a button operation is input, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined operation sound (S1752). When the goal in the long-press effect (for example, the button remains pressed for a predetermined time or longer) is achieved, the effect display control means 305 hides the button image 500, turns off the button lamp, and displays the result of the button operation. is displayed (S1705). Then, the button operation is switched from a valid state to an invalid state (S1715).

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the ninth embodiment, when a development image (the development pattern described above) suggesting the development of a performance is suggested by an operation on the performance button 109, the operation mode for the performance button 109 while the development image is displayed is This allows the player to arbitrarily select the performance mode after development. Thereby, the content of the variable performance can be adjusted according to the player's preference, and the overall interest of the variable performance can be increased.

Furthermore, while the developed image is displayed, it is not clearly indicated on the performance display device 60 that the button operation is valid, and the button operation for selecting the performance mode after development is performed as a back button operation, so that the game machine can be operated It is possible to add additional elements and increase the interest of the game. In addition, if the button operation during the first validity period to display the developed image is a repeated press or long press, the button operation during the second validity period following the first validity period may be repeated or long-pressed, even if the player does not intend to do so. There is a possibility that input may occur due to the flow (inertia) of player operations during one valid period. Therefore, it is preferable that the button operation during the first valid period for displaying the developed image be a single press (press once).

A first modification will be explained. In the above embodiment, as a back button performance, an operation on the performance button 109 is accepted while not clearly indicating on the screen that it is a button operation valid period (second valid period) during the temporary stop of the developed symbol. As a modification, it may be clearly indicated on the screen that the button operation valid period (second valid period) is in effect even during the temporary stop of the developed symbol. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display the button image 500 on the screen during the temporary stop of the developed symbol, or may display an indicator image indicating the length of the second valid period. Further, the operation for selecting the developed performance mode during the second validity period may be performed using another operation input device (cross key 110, etc.) instead of operating the performance button 109.

A second modification will be explained. In the above embodiment, the post-development effect branches to one of a plurality of types of button effects. As a modification, at least one of the branch destinations in the post-development presentation may be other than the button presentation.

A third modification will be explained. The special performance pattern that can be selected by the performance determining means 303 includes a special performance pattern that can be selected even if there is no button operation during the second validity period (in other words, even if the conditions for transition to a continuous press performance or a long press performance are not satisfied). ), an exceptional special performance pattern that transitions to a post-development performance including a continuous hit performance or a long press performance may be included. In the performance determination table referred to by the performance determination means 303, the selection probability of a special performance pattern that transitions to a developed performance including a continuous press performance or a long press performance when there is no button operation during the second validity period is set in the second validity period. The selection probability may be set to be lower than the selection probability of a special performance pattern that transitions to a post-development performance including a one-press performance when there is no button operation.

A fourth modification will be explained. Although not mentioned in the above embodiment, the effect display control means 305 may cause the button lamp to emit light (light up) in different ways for each of the one-press effect, multiple-press effect, and long-press effect, and the color of the emitted light and The patterns may be different. For example, the button lamp may be made to emit white light in a single press effect, the button lamp may be made to emit yellow light in a repeated press effect, and the button lamp may be made to emit orange light in a long press effect. In addition, if the expectation of a jackpot is high (or if the jackpot is confirmed), whether it is a single press effect, continuous press effect, or long press effect, there will be a common aspect that suggests this (for example, red or giraffe color (yellow)). +orange)) may cause the button lamp to emit light.

A fifth modification will be explained. In the foreground presentation, a roulette image or the like may be displayed instead of displaying a developing pattern in response to a button operation, and the stop pattern thereof may be changed in accordance with the button operation mode. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display a rotating roulette image when a button is operated during the first valid period of the foreground effect, and when the button is pressed while the roulette is rotating (during the second valid period). The rotation of the roulette becomes slow, and subsequent developments may be distributed depending on the mode of button operation input during the slow rotation. For example, if the number of button presses input during slow rotation is 0 to 1, it will transition to a single press effect, and if the number of button presses input during slow rotation is 2 or more, it will transition to a continuous press effect. , If the button is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time or more during slow rotation, a transition may be made to a long-press effect.

The configuration for disabling the auto button function described in the modification of the eighth embodiment can also be applied to the ninth embodiment. It is preferable that the auto button function be automatically disabled at least during the period during which the developed symbols are being displayed (ie, the second valid period).

<10th example>
This embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to ninth embodiments, and the explanation of common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the tenth embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to ninth embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variable performance pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "special performance pattern") is selected, a plurality of button performances are simultaneously executed (in other words, displayed). A plurality of button performances may have different operation modes for the performance button 109 that is a trigger for advancing the performance. In the embodiment, at least two button performances among the plurality of button performances differ in the operation mode for the performance button 109 that is a trigger for advancing the performance. Then, among the plurality of button performances, only the button performance corresponding to the operation mode input to the performance button 109 is changed. Further, in the embodiment, for a plurality of button performances, even if one button performance ends (in other words, even if the performance after the button operation is displayed), the button operation valid period for the other button performances continues.

Specifically, the special performance pattern specifies that a plurality of special performances that prompt operation inputs to input devices such as the performance button 109 and the lever 112 are executed simultaneously, and the plurality of special performances are such that each performance is progressed. The manner of operation of the effect button 109 for causing the effect may be determined differently. When the performance determining means 303 decides to execute a performance based on the special performance pattern, the performance display control means 305 displays a plurality of special performances at the same time, and when an operation to the performance button 109 is input while displaying a plurality of special performances. If so, the special effect corresponding to the operation mode input to the effect button 109 among the plurality of special effects being displayed can be advanced. In addition, a valid period of operation on the performance button 109 is defined in the special performance pattern. The effect display control means 305 is configured to be able to proceed with another special effect in response to a new operation input to the effect button 109 even after one special effect has progressed, as long as it is within the validity period. Ru.

In this embodiment, the entire performance displayed based on the above-described special performance pattern is referred to as a "special performance", and a plurality of individual performances displayed simultaneously within the special performance are referred to as a "button performance". FIG. 57 schematically shows an example of screen transition of special effects in the tenth embodiment. The special effect screen 720a shows the initial screen of the special effect. The effect display control means 305 displays three button effects and one button image 500 on the special effect screen 720a.

The three button effects include a single press effect 722, a repeated press effect 724, and a long press effect 726. The one-press effect 722 is a button effect that is advanced by pressing the effect button 109 once. The continuous hit effect 724 is a button effect that is advanced by repeatedly hitting the effect button 109. The long-press effect 726 is a button effect that is advanced by long-pressing the effect button 109. Note that progressing the button effect may also mean displaying the result of the button operation in the screen area of the button effect corresponding to the operation mode input to the effect button 109, and a predetermined story for each button operation. It may also be possible to display animations based on. In the embodiment, success (with increased chance) or failure (with no increased chance) is displayed as the result of button operation. Note that the presence or absence of a jackpot (win or loss) may be displayed.

If the performance button 109 is not pressed again within 0.5 seconds after being pressed once (strictly speaking, it is pressed and released), the performance determining means 303 determines that the performance button 109 has been pressed once, and notifies the user to that effect. The effect display control means 305 is notified. In addition, if the performance button 109 is pressed once (strictly speaking, pressed and released) and then pressed again within 0.5 seconds, the performance determining means 303 determines that the performance button 109 is a repeated press operation, and indicates that is notified to the effect display control means 305. Further, if the effect button 109 is kept pressed for a predetermined period of time or more (for example, one second or more), the effect determining means 303 determines that the effect button 109 is a long-press operation, and notifies the effect display control means 305 to that effect. .

When the performance button 109 is pressed once while the special performance screen 720a is displayed, the performance display control means 305 advances only the one-press performance 722 among the three button performances, as shown on the special performance screen 720b. . Furthermore, when the performance button 109 is pressed repeatedly while the special performance screen 720a is displayed, the performance display control means 305 advances only the continuous press performance 724 among the three button performances, as shown in the special performance screen 720c. Further, when the performance button 109 is pressed for a long time while the special performance screen 720a is displayed, the performance display control means 305 advances only the long press performance 726 among the three button performances, as shown on the special performance screen 720d. .

As a modified example, when the effect button 109 is pressed once while the special effect screen 720a is displayed, the effect display control means 305 may display the one-press effect 722 of the special effect screen 720a while it is being selected. For example, an image indicating "selected" may be added to the image of the one-click effect 722. If the effect button 109 is pressed one more time while the one-press effect 722 is being selected, the effect display control means 305 will proceed with the one-press effect 722, as shown in the special effect screen 720b. good. If the one-press effect 722 starts 0.5 seconds after the effect button 109 is pressed once, it may make the player feel uncomfortable. By inserting the "selecting" state, players are less likely to feel uncomfortable. In addition, when controlling as in the modified example, the operation for selecting the continuous hit effect 724 is started by continuously operating the button for a predetermined time or more (long press operation) while the special effect screen 720a is displayed, Only the continuous hit effect 724 or the long press effect 726 can be selected, and in this state, by releasing your hand from the effect button 109 until a predetermined timing (such as 0.5 seconds later), the continuous press effect 724 is selected, and the predetermined If the operation is continued even at the timing of , the long press effect 726 may be selected.

Further, as a combination of button effects displayed simultaneously in the special effect, a combination including a plurality of button effects that require the same type of button operation may be provided. For example, combinations such as "one-press effect (1)," "one-press effect (2)," and "long-press effect" may be provided. In this case, the effect display control means 305 controls one press effect (for example, a single press effect) when the effect button 109 is pressed once for the first time, based on a predetermined order or priority of effects. 1)), and when the second performance button 109 is pressed once, the other one-press performance (for example, one-press performance (2)) may be advanced. Alternatively, when the performance button 109 is pressed once, the performance display control means 305 advances one one-press performance (for example, one-press performance (1)), and inputs a second input means different from the performance button 109. At the time of one operation, the other one-push effect (for example, one-push effect (2)) may be advanced. The second input means may be the cross key 110, or may be a lever 112 or the like (not shown) that can be pulled forward.

The valid period of a button operation in a special performance is the execution time of one button performance other than a special performance (for example, the time from when the progression starts with the input of the corresponding button operation until the end after displaying the result) ) is determined longer. In the embodiment, the valid period of button operation in the special effect is set to be longer than the total execution time of three button effects displayed simultaneously on the special effect screen. The performance display control means 305 advances another button performance in response to a new operation input to the performance button 109, if the button operation valid period continues even after one button performance has progressed.

With this aspect, even if a result indicating failure is displayed in one button effect, a result indicating success may be displayed in another button effect. On the other hand, the result is determined by the last selected button effect (in other words, button effects other than the last one do not indicate the result of the jackpot lottery or development to super reach, etc., and are not that important). If the player holds it, the interest of the special effects will decrease. Therefore, if a result indicating success is displayed in the first button performance completed earlier, the content indicating success or failure in the subsequent second button performance (for example, content suggesting development of the performance or the presence or absence of a jackpot) Instead, content suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 100, content suggesting the reliability of the fluctuation, and content suggesting the presence or absence of promotion after a jackpot (promotion to a higher profit jackpot, etc.) are displayed. You can. This makes it possible to notify performance results such as jackpot lottery results and super reach development even at times other than the button performance executed in the final special performance, making it difficult for players to feel like they are in a race. Even if success is displayed in the button performance, the player can be motivated to execute other button performances, and participation in the button performances can be further promoted.

Next, an example of a special performance pattern lottery process by the performance determining means 303 in this embodiment will be explained. When a special performance pattern is selected as a variable performance pattern, the performance determining means 303 determines the operation type of three button performances, the performance pattern of each button performance, and the success or failure of the performance (success or failure of the result) as a scenario of the special performance. ) (the production pattern of the special production) is determined.

FIG. 58 shows an example of a special effect scenario. In this figure, "○" indicates success, and "x" indicates failure. For example, the scenario with ID0 is a scenario in which all button effects result in failure, so to speak, a false scenario (a scenario in which a failure is announced at the same time as the special effect ends, and development to a jackpot, super reach, etc. is not notified). ). Furthermore, although the scenario with ID1 is different from ID0 in the content of the one-button press effect, it is still a fake scenario in which all button effects indicate failure. In the scenario of ID5, failure is displayed when the one-push effect (2) is selected, but success is displayed when the one-push effect (1) is selected. In the scenario with ID21, success is displayed no matter which button effect is selected. A performance determining means 303 selects one of the plurality of scenarios by lottery, and when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it selects a scenario in which at least one button performance indicates success.

As partially described above, when a button performance that results in a success is executed by a player's button operation during a special performance, the performance determining means 303 determines the remaining button performances (unexecuted button performances). Alternatively, the presentation contents associated with button operations may be replaced with setting suggestions or expectation notification (reliability notification). In this case, the effect determining means 303 may select specific scenario data by lottery with reference to a table storing replacement scenario data (with the effect content replaced as described above). Note that the replacement scenario data may be one that changes the corresponding operation mode itself; for example, it may be one that changes an unexecuted multiple-hit performance (the result is failure) to a one-shot performance (the result is a setting suggestion). good. Furthermore, even if the button effects are of the same type, they may be changed to button effects with higher expectations. Furthermore, when a button effect that results in success is executed and the scenario is replaced, the effect display control means 305 displays the aspect (appearance such as shape and color) of the button image 500 displayed on the screen of the special effect. , you may switch to a mode with higher expectations for jackpots and performance development (change from white button to red button, etc.).

According to the pachinko game machine 100 of the tenth embodiment, the player can arbitrarily select a button effect to proceed from among a plurality of button effects displayed simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to increase the interest of the entire variable performance including the button performance, and to encourage the player's participation in the button performance. Further, even if one button effect is finished, other button effects can be continued, so the contents of many button effects can be presented to the player. Even if the result of the previous button performance is a failure, the result of the subsequent button performance may be a success, so the overall interest of the special performance can be increased, and the player's participation in the button performance can be promoted. be able to.

A first modification will be explained. Here, another example of the lottery method will be explained. The performance determining means 303 determines the operation type and performance pattern of three button performances to be displayed simultaneously in the special performance. In addition, the performance determining means 303 of the embodiment determined the success or failure of each of the three button performances, but the performance determining means 303 of this variation determines the success or failure of each of the three button performances. ) Decide how many button effects will be successful. In other words, the timing of occurrence of successful button presentation is determined. When a specific button effect is selected by a specific button operation during a special effect, the effect display control means 305 indicates the success or failure of the selected button effect according to the execution order of the button effect during the special effect. set.

For example, if the effect determining means 303 determines that the first button effect is a failure and the second button effect is a success, the effect display control means 305 will control the button effect selected for the first time regardless of its type. The result of failure is displayed, and the result of success is displayed regardless of the type of button performance selected for the second time. According to this aspect, since success is displayed in a predetermined order of button performances in the special performance, it is possible to reduce the element of luck of the player regarding the success of the button performances.

A second modification will be explained. The performance control means 304 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a function of automatically inputting a continuous press operation for a button performance during a period in which a long press operation on the performance button 109 is input during the valid button operation period, according to settings by the player. (hereinafter also referred to as "auto continuous hit function") may be provided. Here, if the player has enabled the automatic continuous press function and there are both a continuous press effect and a long press effect among the unexecuted button effects in the special effect, the effect display control means 305 controls the effect button When a long press operation for 109 is input, the long press effect may be advanced before the continuous press effect. Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort that the continuous hit performance is progressing even though the performance button 109 has been pressed for a long time.

Furthermore, if the player has enabled the auto-repeat-hit function and there is a repeat-press effect among the unexecuted button effects in the special effect but there is no long-press effect, the effect display control means 305 controls the effect button When a long press operation for 109 is input, a continuous hit effect may be advanced. Note that during the special performance, the automatic continuous hit function may be automatically disabled and an image indicating this may be displayed on the screen.

A third modification will be explained. The performance control means 304 of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 may have an auto button function that automatically inputs an operation on the performance button 109 during the valid button operation period according to settings by the player. When the player has enabled the auto button function, the effect display control means 305 may advance the three button effects displayed in the special effect in a predetermined order. For example, a single press effect, a continuous press effect, and a long press effect may be performed in this order. Furthermore, among the three button effects, the button effect displayed at the top, the button effect displayed at the lower right, and the button effect displayed at the lower left may be advanced in this order.

A fourth modification will be explained. If a player inputs a specific button operation (e.g. long press operation) and selects a specific button effect (e.g. long press effect), while the specific button effect is in progress, the player inputs a specific button operation (e.g. long press operation) and selects a specific button effect (e.g. long press effect). A special performance pattern may be provided that defines a contradictory performance in which the result of another button performance is displayed in an area of another button performance (for example, a repeated press performance) when a long press operation is input. In order to suggest that the expectation of a jackpot is high, to suggest that a jackpot has been confirmed, or to suggest a setting, the performance determining means 303 selects a special performance pattern that defines a contradictory performance with a predetermined probability (relatively low probability). You may. Further, a special performance pattern may be further provided in which all three button performances are displayed at the same time during the special performance, all of which are of the same type (for example, all three are one-press performances). Normally, the progress is made for each button performance, but when this special performance pattern is selected, the performance display control means 305 causes all three button performances to proceed simultaneously and display the results at the same time with a single button operation. You can.

A fifth modification will be explained. The special effect pattern may define button operation valid periods with different end timings as button operation valid periods for a plurality of button effects (for example, one-press effect 722, continuous press effect 724, and long-press effect 726 in FIG. 57). . Further, the special effect pattern may define button operation valid periods with different start timings and end timings as the button operation valid periods of a plurality of button effects. Further, the special performance pattern may be set such that the execution time of the performance after receiving the corresponding button operation (also referred to as post-operation performance) is different for each button performance to be displayed on the special performance screen. In this case, the special performance pattern may define different timings as timings for disabling button operation input in each button performance (in other words, the end timing of the button operation valid period). The effect display control means 305 displays a button image and an image indicating a button operation valid period in the display area of each button effect on the special effect screen 720a based on the special effect pattern, and displays a button image and an image indicating the button operation valid period. A plurality of button performances for which button operations have been input may proceed simultaneously. According to this modification, it is possible to make the player check the remaining time of each button performance and make a judgment and selection that ``I can make it in time with this button performance,'' thereby further increasing the interest of the button performance.

A sixth modification will be explained. Here, a first application example of the technical concept described in the tenth embodiment will be described. The method of making it possible to select the effect to be advanced depending on the mode of button operation from a plurality of button effects displayed simultaneously during the special effect can also be applied to other processes. For example, the effect display control means 305 may execute a button hold effect as a pre-read effect. The button hold effect is a mode in which a hold image (an image indicating hold of a win/fail lottery value, etc.) on the effect display device 60 is displayed in a button-like manner, and the hold image suggests the level of expectation in response to a player's button operation. (for example, a blue or red pending image).

Since the button hold effect is a effect that continues over a plurality of symbol fluctuation periods, the effect display control means 305 may perform other functions that request the player to operate the button while the button hold effect (for example, one press) is displayed. A button effect (for example, one press) may be displayed. When the effect button 109 is pressed once with both the button hold effect and the button effect displayed (for example, if it is not pressed again within 0.5 seconds), the effect display control means 305 controls the button effect. You may proceed. On the other hand, when the performance button 109 is repeatedly pressed (for example, when it is pressed again within 0.5 seconds), the effect display control means 305 may advance the button hold effect, for example, change the appearance of the button hold. You may let them. In this case, the effect display control means 305 may display an image encouraging repeated clicking near the button hold image. In addition, if a button effect (here, repeated hits) is displayed while a button hold effect (here, repeated hits) is displayed, the effect display control means 305 changes the progress condition of the button hold effect to a long press, and also changes the button hold effect to a long press. An image encouraging long press may be displayed near the image.

A seventh modification will be explained. Here, a second application example of the technical idea described in the tenth embodiment will be described. In a situation where the button effect during the special effect of the tenth embodiment is a setting suggestion, the effect display control means 305 changes the content of the setting suggestion based on the player's re-operation mode without inheriting the previous operation mode. It may be configured to display the information. For example, (1) when a long press operation is input, a setting value may be directly suggested (for example, any one of setting values 1 to 6 may be displayed). (2) When a repeated tapping operation is input, it may be displayed whether the setting is high (setting value is 5 or 6) as a high setting suggestion, or if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is actually set to high. This may be indicated. (3) When a single press operation is input, it may be displayed whether or not the low setting (setting value is 1 or 2) is negated, or whether the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not actually set to the low setting ( If the setting value is 3 to 6), it may be displayed that the low setting is denied. Further, in the case of a single press operation, content suggesting whether the set value is an even number or an odd number may be displayed. According to this modification, since the contents of the setting suggestion vary depending on the button operation mode, the player can select the information he/she wants to know regarding the settings depending on the button operation mode.

Note that in a situation where the button effect is a setting suggestion, the setting suggestion does not necessarily have to be displayed, and the setting suggestion may be displayed with a predetermined probability. Further, as a preferred embodiment, a part of the button effects that proceed based on each operation may also serve as a setting suggestion. This example will be explained below.

When a long press is input for a button performance, the performance display control means 305 may display content indicating the reliability of the symbol change (in other words, the expectation level of a jackpot) as the content of the button performance. For example, the effect display control means 305 may display the reliability and gradually increase the reliability from "0.00%" while the button remains pressed. The confidence level of "11.11%" suggests that setting 1 is rejected, "22.22%" suggests setting 2 or higher, "33.33%" suggests setting 3 or higher, and " "44.44%" may suggest setting 4 or higher, "45.60%" may indicate confirmation of high setting, and "66.66%" may suggest setting 6. At the time of setting suggestion, the performance display control means 305 may stop displaying the reliability at "11.11%" or the like for a predetermined period of time (2 seconds, etc.) (however, the reliability is increased in the background). In this case, since "66.66%" can be reached only during symbol fluctuations with high reliability, the player can obtain information regarding high settings when the expectation of a jackpot is high.

When repeated hits are input for the button performance, the content notified by the success of the button performance (for example, the reach title of the development destination + expectation level display) may be promoted based on the repeated hits. For example, if a reach title with white text is normally displayed, repeated hits may promote the display to a title with red text or a title with a giraffe pattern (orange + yellow). Further, the setting suggestion may be such that when the title display mode is promoted, the expectation level display (for example, the number of stars) or the like may be displayed in accordance with the setting value. For example, a change from 2 stars to 4 stars may suggest a setting of 4 or higher. The number of stars may be up to five. In this case, the 5 stars may be a confirmed jackpot, and instead of setting suggestions, the expectation level of the 5 stars may be displayed together with the rainbow pattern reach title. Note that in the case of setting 6, a setting 6 confirmation effect such as displaying six star images beyond the frame may be provided.

When a single press is input for the button effect, the effect display control means 305 may display a card image showing a predetermined character as a so-called lively effect. For example, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of selecting a female character may be. Further, when a card image with a special appearance (such as a super rare card or an ultra rare card) is displayed, setting 1 may be denied regardless of whether the character is male or female.

This second application example is also applicable to embodiments other than the tenth embodiment. For example, if a single press of the production button 109 is instructed in a normal button production, an operation different from the instruction, such as a long press, repeated presses, or operation of the cross key 110, may be input, resulting in an element similar to the back button. As a result, it may be configured to change from a normal expectation level notice when executing a one-press effect to a setting suggestion effect depending on the operation mode. In this case, the performance itself may be replaced. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect may be additionally displayed after the normal expectation level notice is displayed.

<Eleventh Example>
The present embodiment will be described below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to tenth embodiments, and the explanation of common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the eleventh embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to tenth embodiments, and the modified examples.

In this embodiment, a button effect is displayed when a predetermined type of variable effect pattern (hereinafter also referred to as a "special effect pattern") is selected. The button performance includes a selection performance that allows the player to arbitrarily select the development destination of the scenario (the content of the performance display development of the special performance pattern). In the selection performance, a selection operation for selecting the first scenario as the scenario development destination and a confirmation operation for confirming the selection of the first scenario are executed, thereby developing contents in accordance with the first scenario. On the other hand, in the selection performance, after inputting the first scenario selection operation, it is possible to cancel the expansion to the first scenario and change the expansion to the second scenario. The second scenario is developed by not pressing the button during the button presentation or by inputting a cancel after the first scenario selection operation during the button presentation.

Specifically, the special effect pattern includes a special effect that includes an operation validity period for the effect button 109, and a special effect that allows selection of either the first scenario or the second scenario (button effect in the embodiment). It is determined that it will be carried out. The special performance is a performance that imitates betting at a casino, and the first scenario is, for example, a scenario in which the player (player side) places a bet, and the second scenario is, for example, a scenario in which the player does not place a bet. The effect display control means 305 displays the special effect when the effect determining means 303 decides to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and performs a selection operation of selecting the first scenario during the valid period of the button operation in the special effect; When a confirmation operation for confirming the selection of the first scenario is input, content corresponding to the first scenario is displayed as the content of the special performance. The effect display control means 305 displays the special effect when a predetermined cancel operation is input after the selection operation for selecting the first scenario is input or when no button operation is performed during the button operation valid period for the special effect. Contents corresponding to the second scenario are displayed as contents.

The special performance of the embodiment includes an introductory performance that accepts whether or not to bet that the result of the performance will be a specific result (for example, that a predetermined goal will be achieved). Further, the special performance of the embodiment includes a post-development performance that indicates whether the result of placing a BET is a success or failure, or whether the result of not placing a BET is a success or failure. In addition, in the special performance of the embodiment, it is possible to accept a selection operation for selecting to place a bet, and furthermore, it is possible to accept a BET confirmation operation or a cancellation operation, which are operations that can be input integrally with the selection operation. Specifically, the start of a long press on the production button 109 is accepted as a BET selection operation. Furthermore, the fact that the long press on the performance button 109 ends within a predetermined period is accepted as a BET confirmation operation. Further, the fact that the production button 109 has been pressed for a predetermined period or more is accepted as a cancel operation.

FIG. 59 is a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production according to the eleventh embodiment. 59(a) to 59(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This figure shows the performance process defined by the special performance pattern, and also shows the performance process when the player selects a BET in the special performance and confirms the BET. When the special performance pattern is selected by the performance determining means 303, the performance display control means 305 executes the special performance and first starts the introduction performance in S1800 as shown in FIG. 59(b). In the introductory presentation, a button promotion presentation that encourages button operation is displayed (S1801). When the button activation effect is started, the button operation is switched from the invalid state (S1810) to the valid state (S1811). Further, in order to prompt the player to operate the button, the button image 500 is displayed (S1830), and the button lamp is made to emit white light (S1820). In the button pushing effect, a message such as "Press and hold the button!" may be further displayed.

The player starts a long press operation on the performance button 109 during the button stimulation performance (S1840). When a valid long-press operation (for example, the pressed state of the production button 109 continues for a predetermined time or more) is detected, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1850). The performance display control means 305 displays a BET selection performance indicating that a BET has been selected (S1802), and then displays a cancellation promotion performance that encourages the player whether or not to cancel the BET (S1802). S1803). In the cancellation promotion effect, if you stop pressing and holding the bet within a predetermined confirmation operation acceptance period (for example, within 8 seconds from the start of the cancellation promotion effect), the bet will be confirmed, and if you press and hold the bet longer than the confirmation operation acceptance period. It may also include content indicating that the BET will be canceled if the bet continues.

The effect display control means 305 displays the result of the special effect (in this case, the development described below) when the long press of the effect button 109 continues for a predetermined period of time or more (for example, 2 seconds or more from the start of the cancel incitement effect) after the start of the cancel incitement effect. A reliability notification performance indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the post-performance) will be successful is displayed (S1804). Here, the player stops holding down the button (that is, releases his/her hand from the performance button 109) within the confirmation operation reception period.

If the end of the long press (that is, the input of the BET confirmation operation) is detected within the confirmation operation acceptance period, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1851). The sound effect in S1850 is a sound effect indicating BET selection, while the sound effect in S1851 is a sound effect indicating BET confirmation. The sound effect of S1850 and the sound effect of S1851 may differ in at least one of size, pitch, and tone.

Further, when a BET confirmation operation is input, the button operation is switched from a valid state to an invalid state (S1812). The effect display control means 305 ends the display of the button image 500. Further, to indicate that the BET has been finalized, the button lamp is made to emit green light (S1821). Further, a BET confirmation effect indicating that the BET has been confirmed is displayed (S1805).

The effect display control means 305 displays the post-development effect after displaying the BET confirmed effect (S1806). The post-development performance here includes content indicating whether the bet result is a success or a failure. In the case of success, content suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot has increased, a notice of increased chances, etc. may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of failure, content suggesting that the level of expectation of a jackpot has decreased or content suggesting that the level of expectation is relatively low may be displayed.

FIG. 60 is also a time chart schematically showing the production process of the special production according to the eleventh embodiment. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This figure shows the performance process defined by the special performance pattern, and also shows the performance process when the player once selects a BET in the special performance and then cancels the BET. Hereinafter, points different from the production process explained in S59 will be explained.

Here, the player cancels the BET by continuing to press and hold the production button 109 until the end of the confirmation operation acceptance period. That is, in the special performance of this embodiment, the performance determining means 303 determines that the BET is canceled when the long press is not completed before the end of the confirmation operation acceptance period, and the performance display control means 305 and the audio control means 306 to notify of cancellation.

When the BET is canceled, the audio control means 306 outputs a predetermined sound effect (S1852). The sound effect in S1852 is a sound effect indicating cancellation of the BET. Therefore, the sound effect in S1852 may be different from the sound effect in S1850 indicating BET selection and the sound effect in S1851 in FIG. 59 indicating BET confirmation in at least one of the size, pitch, and tone.

Furthermore, when the BET is canceled, the button operation switches from a valid state to an invalid state (S1812). The effect display control means 305 ends the display of the button image 500. Further, to indicate that the BET has been canceled, the button lamp is caused to emit blue light (S1822). Further, a cancellation effect indicating that the BET has been canceled is displayed (S1807).

The effect display control means 305 displays the developed effect after displaying the cancel effect (S1806). The post-development performance here includes content indicating whether the result of not placing a bet is a success or a failure. In the case of success, content suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot has increased, a notice of increased chances, etc. may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of failure, content suggesting that the level of expectation of a jackpot has decreased or content suggesting that the level of expectation is relatively low may be displayed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the eleventh embodiment, even after the first scenario (the scenario when placing a bet) is selected in the special performance, the second scenario (the scenario when not placing a bet) is selected by inputting a predetermined cancel operation. ), it is possible to increase the flexibility in selecting the content of the performance. Furthermore, since it is possible to input a confirmation operation and a cancellation operation for the first scenario as operations integrated with the selection operation for the first scenario, it is possible to reduce the burden of operation input on the player. Further, after the selection operation of the first scenario, a reliability notification performance is displayed and the player is allowed to decide whether to confirm or cancel the selection, thereby making the performance even more interesting.

A first modification will be explained. If the button operation is not accepted during the button promotion performance in S1801, the performance display control means 305 performs a BET selection performance after the button promotion performance (S1802), a cancel promotion performance (S1803), a reliability notification performance (S1804), and a BET confirmation performance. The effect (S1805) and the cancel effect (S1807) may be skipped. Instead, the effect display control means 305 may display an effect indicating that a bet has not been placed. Further, if a button operation is not accepted during the button activation effect in S1801, the button operation valid period may end at the end of the button activation effect.

A second modification will be explained. A plurality of special effect patterns that can be selected by the effect determining means 303 may be provided. Among the plurality of special performance patterns, a special performance pattern in which the result of placing a bet is a failure and the result of not placing a bet is also a failure may be determined to display a performance indicating a confirmed loss as a performance after development. In addition, the above special performance pattern displays a performance that suggests that the post-development performance is unfavorable (for example, low expectations for a jackpot) during the introduction performance (for example, cancellation promotion and reliability announcement). It may be determined as follows. Also, between the performance pattern of a special performance that becomes a success as a result of a BET and develops into a subsequent performance, and the performance pattern of a special performance that becomes a success as a result of not placing a BET and develops into a subsequent performance, the former is more reliable as a jackpot. By placing a bet and displaying the success pattern (success pattern for one scenario), expectations for the jackpot are increased. It may be configured so that it increases.

A third modification will be explained. This modification is applicable to any of the eighth to eleventh embodiments. In this modification, a technical intervention element related to the operation of the effect button 109 is provided, and specifically, a variable effect pattern (here, a "technical intervention effect pattern") in which setting suggestion information may be obtained by operating the effect button 109 is provided. ) will be established. The effect determining means 303 may select the technical intervention effect pattern with a predetermined probability. The technical intervention performance pattern may display an image that instructs the player to "stop in exactly 5 seconds!". In this case, if the player presses the performance button 109 exactly 5 seconds after the start, the effect display control means 305 may display content suggesting the setting value of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 with a high probability. good. On the other hand, if the timing of the pressing operation deviates from 5 seconds, the effect display control means 305 does not display the setting suggestion information.

Note that a plurality of technical intervention performance patterns having different levels of difficulty may be provided. For example, a low difficulty pattern says "Stop between 4.8 seconds and 5.2 seconds!" (width of 0.4 seconds), while a high difficulty pattern says "Stop between 4.9 seconds and 5.2 seconds!" (with a width of 0.4 seconds). 5. Stop within 1 seconds!'' (width of 0.2 seconds). Further, the technical intervention performance patterns that can be selected for each time period may be different. The effect determining means 303 may determine the current time based on the time information output from the clock means 307, and may select a technical intervention effect pattern corresponding to the current time. For example, in the morning, there is less material to judge the settings of the pachinko machine 100, so a pattern of medium difficulty (for example, a width of 0.4 seconds) is selected, and from noon to evening, a pattern of high difficulty is selected. A pattern (eg, width of 0.2 seconds) is selected, and just before closing, a pattern of extremely low difficulty level (eg, width of 0.5 seconds) may be selected in order to increase the desire to play the next day.

<12th example>
This embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to eleventh embodiments, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the twelfth embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to eleventh embodiments, and the modified examples.

In the twelfth embodiment, after a special symbol different from the plurality of decorative symbols 506 is temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, a symbol variation is displayed again, thereby performing a plurality of pseudo symbol variations. We will explain a technique to increase the interest of pseudo-continuous variation effects (also referred to as ``pseudo-continuous effects'') that make it look like this. The pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment has a pseudo continuous effect (presentation before and after a temporary stop (including display before temporary stop and display immediately after re-variation)) and a pseudo continuous effect in symbol fluctuations accompanied by execution of pseudo continuous effect. By creating a relationship between each performance for consecutive notices (and pseudo consecutive notices) and after-reach notices, we can add production elements other than the number of times as a point to attract players' attention in pseudo consecutive performances, and Increase the interest of serial performances.

Specifically, the effect determining means 303 can determine by lottery a variable effect pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a "pseudo continuous pattern") as the effect content. If the effect display control means 305 displays a preview with content suggesting that a pseudo continuous effect will be performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo continuous effect will be performed with a higher probability than when the preview is not displayed. Display the performance. In addition, when displaying an additional image (a predetermined character image in the embodiment) that is different from the special symbol in the pseudo-continuous production, the production display control means 305 controls the performance that follows the pseudo-continuation production (super reach production in the embodiment). A notice related to the additional image and indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot has increased (in the embodiment, a chance-up notice) is displayed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when an additional image different from the special symbol is displayed in a pseudo-sequential presentation, the expectation level that the presentation following the pseudo-sequential presentation will be a jackpot is lowered by the additional image. It is configured to be higher than when it is not displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as a special symbol, a "pseudo-continuous symbol" which is a special symbol used at the time of temporary stop of the symbol in the pseudo-continuous presentation is exemplified. However, the special design may be any design that suggests the development of the performance, and is not limited to pseudo-continuous designs.

The twelfth embodiment will be described in detail below. The pseudo continuous pattern of this embodiment includes a first step of displaying a preview suggesting that it is a pseudo continuous performance before a temporary stop in the pseudo continuous performance, and a pseudo continuous performance + character image. A second step of displaying and a third step of displaying a super reach effect (including a chance-up effect related to the character image) are defined.

FIG. 61 shows a display example of the first step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 61(a), the effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display a pseudo-continuous effect screen 800 including fluctuations of a plurality of decorative symbols 506 (before temporary stopping) and lines 802. The line 802 is a line preview that suggests that a pseudo continuous effect (in other words, a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506) will occur in this pattern variation.

Although not shown in FIG. 61(a), the effect display control means 305 causes the pseudo continuous effect screen 800 to display a button effect that urges the user to press the effect button 109 along with the dialogue 802. When the depression of the effect button 109 is detected, the effect display control means 305 displays a new line 804 on the pseudo continuous effect screen 800, as shown in FIG. 61(b). The dialogue 804 is a dialogue preview that suggests that if a specific character (in this embodiment, "A-ko") is displayed in the pseudo-continuous performance, the expectation level of a jackpot will increase.

A pseudo continuous pattern in which only the lines 802 are displayed and a pseudo continuous pattern in which the lines 804 can be displayed in addition to the lines 802 are provided, and the effect determining means 303 selects the former pseudo continuous pattern or the latter pseudo continuous pattern with a predetermined probability. A continuous pattern may also be selected. In this case, the dialogue preview on the pseudo continuous performance screen 800 is a preview that may be advanced by pressing a button. In such a situation where multiple stages (in this case, two stages) of dialogue announcements can be made, when the second stage dialogue announcement is executed, the symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to a somewhat long production duration (i.e. symbol fluctuation time) is selected. Therefore, regardless of whether there is a suggestion regarding a pseudo-sequence, if the dialogue preview continues until the second stage or later, the possibility of a pseudo-sequence effect is relatively higher than when the dialogue preview stops at the first stage. It can be said to be expensive.

A modification of the button effect in the first step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. The effect display control means 305 may execute the back button effect during the preview of the lines of the pseudo-connection suggestion (line 802) and the additional image suggestion (line 804). For example, the effect display control means 305 does not display content that prompts button operations during the dialogue preview, but if the effect button 109 is pressed during the dialogue preview, the effect display control means 305 may provide a suggestion regarding the display probability of the additional image (even if it is expressed as a percentage). A final notification may also be displayed on the pseudo-continuation effect screen 800. Further, such a presentation process may be defined in a pseudo-continuous pattern. Note that the effect display control means 305 may display content that prompts a button operation during the dialogue preview, that is, may display a normal button effect other than the back button.

Further, the button effect may be a long press effect or a repeated press effect in which a predetermined target (press duration or number of presses) is set. For example, it may be a continuous hit effect that displays a message such as ``Press the button repeatedly to let off fireworks!'', or it may display an image of fireworks going off in case of success and sparks flying in the form of continuation, development, etc. . Furthermore, the character may be shown in a pattern of sparks as an additional image. In case of failure, an image showing the fireworks not being launched may be displayed. In the case of such a button effect, there is no need to suggest a pseudo-relationship (for example, displaying the dialogue 802). If the button production is successful (in other words, if the goal of the button production is achieved), the production will progress (displaying the sparks and stopping the pseudo-coupling pattern), so there is no need to suggest the pseudo-coupling. It is. Note that an additional image may be suggested (for example, the dialogue 804 is displayed) in a presentation that encourages the success or failure of the button presentation.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the second step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 62(a), the effect display control means 305 causes the pseudo continuous effect screen 800 to display a temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo continuous pattern 806 (the pattern indicating "NEXT"). The effect display control means 305 displays a character 808 (here, the image of child A suggested by the line 804) in the vicinity of the pseudo-continuous pattern 806 when temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous pattern 806.

Although not shown in FIG. 62(a), the effect display control means 305 displays a button effect that prompts the press of the effect button 109 on the pseudo continuous effect screen 800 when the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo continuous pattern 806 are temporarily stopped. let If the press of the effect button 109 is detected and the result of the button operation is successful according to the pseudo-continuation pattern, the effect display control means 305 causes the decorative pattern 506 to change again, as shown in FIG. 62(b). At times, the character 808 is displayed in a standby state in a predetermined area at the corner of the screen.

A modification of the button effect in the second step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. The effect display control means 305 may initially hide the character 808 when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo-continuous pattern 806. When an operation is input to the production button 109 while the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo-continuous pattern 806 are temporarily stopped (while they are shaking, etc.), the production display control means 305 causes the character 808 to appear in the vicinity of the pseudo-continuous pattern 806. You may let them.

Further, the effect display control means 305 may display a button effect for generating a pseudo series (in other words, a temporary stop) before temporarily stopping the decorative pattern 506 or the pseudo continuous pattern 806. This button effect may include a message such as "Press the button to generate a pseudo-connection" together with the button image 500. The effect display control means 305 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern 506 and the pseudo continuous pattern 806 in response to the depression of the effect button 109. The effect display control means 305 may add an additional image (character 808) to the button image 500 when displaying the button image 500 in the button effect. That is, the character 808 may be added to the button image 500 instead of the pseudo-continuous pattern 806; for example, the character 808 may be displayed on the button image 500 or at a position near the button image 500. The additional image may be an image of a timer, and the timer effect described in the eighth embodiment may be executed before the chance-up effect described later.

FIG. 63 shows a display example of the third step of the pseudo-continuous effect. As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the effect display control means 305 displays a plurality of decorative symbols 506 in a ready-to-reach state on the pseudo continuous effect screen 800. In addition, the effect display control means 305 moves the character 808, which has been displayed on standby at the corner of the screen, to the center of the screen, and displays a chance-up effect using the character 808 on the pseudo continuous effect screen 800. The chance-up effect may be a cut-in effect that indicates that the expectation level of a jackpot has increased before the win/loss branch is displayed. A specific example of chance-up production is shown below.

FIG. 63(a) shows a pending change effect as an example of a chance-up effect. The effect display control means 305 displays four pending images corresponding to the held first winning/failure lottery value (or second winning/failure lottery value), one pending image corresponding to the lottery value of the fluctuation (current fluctuation), A total of five pending images 810 are displayed on the pseudo-continuous effect screen 800. The effect display control means 305 displays a pending change effect in which the pending image 810 corresponding to the change changes to a mode indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high due to the action of the character 808.

FIG. 63(b) shows a button effect as an example of a chance-up effect. The effect display control means 305 is a button effect that prompts the player to operate a button, and displays a button effect including a button image 500. The effect display control means 305 displays a button effect including content in which the button image 500 changes to a mode indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is relatively high due to the action of the character 808. For example, the appearance of the button image 500 may be changed from white to red. In addition, when the performance button 109 is pressed during the button performance, the performance display control means 305 may display that the jackpot is confirmed, a further chance increase, etc. as a result of the button operation.

An example of the button effect in the third step of the pseudo-continuous effect will be explained. Before displaying the chance-up performance using the character 808, the performance display control means 305 may display a button performance for the purpose of promoting the standby performance indicating the standby state of the character 808 to the chance-up performance. For example, upon pressing the performance button 109, the performance display control means 305 may change the character 808 to a mode that indicates that the expectation of a jackpot has increased, or increase the number of characters 808. (proliferation). Furthermore, when upgrading from a standby performance to a chance-up performance, the button image 500 may be displayed in the button performance, and the button image 500 may be changed to a state with high expectations, as in FIG. 63(b). . Note that if the button image 500 is initially displayed in a high-expectation mode, instead of changing the mode of the button image 500, the character 808 in a standby state displays a high-expectation suggestive performance (the line "Geki Atsu!"). etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, the effect display control means 305 may perform a back button effect using a button lamp during the ready-to-reach effect. For example, the effect display control means 305 does not display content that prompts button operations on the screen during the reach effect, but when a predetermined button operation (repeated press, long press, etc.) is input, the effect display control means 305 changes the button lamp to blue, blue, etc. The level of expectation of a jackpot may be indicated to the player by changing the color from yellow to red (stepping up the lamp). The performance display control means 305 may promote the standby performance to a chance-up performance in response to repeated hits or long presses in conjunction with such a button lamp performance or simultaneously.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment not only indicates the occurrence of a temporary stop with a notice before the temporary stop of the pseudo-sequential effect (for example, the line 802 in FIG. 61(a)), but also The content of the performance to be executed after the temporary stop (for example, the chance-up performance shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)) is also suggested during the pseudo continuous performance (for example, the line 804 in FIG. 61(b)). Furthermore, when an additional image is displayed in a pseudo-continuous performance (for example, the character 808 in FIG. 62), the pachinko gaming machine 100 displays a notice related to the additional image in a reach-to-reach performance that follows the pseudo-continuous performance, and increases the expectation level of the jackpot. A notice (for example, the chance-up effect shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)) is displayed to indicate that the amount has increased. Thereby, the relevance (in other words, a sense of unity) of the entire variable performance including the pseudo-continuous performance can be enhanced, and the expectation level of a jackpot can be effectively suggested in the flow of the entire variable performance.

An example of a lottery method for a pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. The pseudo continuous effect of this embodiment includes a first step of displaying a preview suggesting that it is a pseudo continuous effect before a temporary stop, a second step of displaying a pseudo continuous effect + character image, and a super reach effect (character image Since this includes a third step of displaying a related chance-up effect (including related chance-up effects), the content of the first stage performance needs to be related to the second stage performance content. Therefore, in this example, the performance content of the latter stage is determined first.

Specifically, (1) in the pattern table held by the performance determining means 303, a specific variation pattern of a special symbol that can be determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 and a pseudo continuous performance It is associated with a variable performance pattern (also referred to as a sub-variable pattern) that defines the. The sub-variation pattern determines the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuous performance and the mode of reach (presence or absence of reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.).

(2) When the production determining means 303 selects a sub-variation pattern including elements such as "pseudo series + ○○ reach" according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the preview content in the pseudo 1 production, the preview content in the pseudo 2 The contents of the preview in the performance (the contents of the preview in the pseudo three performances) and the contents of the reach performance (for example, character A reach, character B reach, etc.) are determined by lottery. (3) The performance determining means 303 determines the detailed pattern of the reach performance by lottery. In addition, it is determined whether or not to perform a chance-up performance in the ready-to-win performance, and a flag is set to indicate whether or not a chance-up display (that is, an additional image display) may be performed during the pseudo-continuous performance (before the ready-to-win performance).

(4) Determine the display mode when the pseudo consecutive symbols are stopped for pseudo 2 performance + pseudo 3 performance. That is, the effect determining means 303 determines by lottery whether or not to suggest an additional image in the preview in the second pseudo effect. If the selection with additional image suggestion is won, the pseudo-continuous pattern is changed to one with an additional image (for example, character 808). In addition, if an additional image is not suggested in the preview in the pseudo 2 effect, it may be the same as the normal effect lottery. During this lottery, the effect determining means 303 switches the lottery table depending on whether or not the flag described in (3) above is set. In other words, a table is used in which a preview suggesting an additional image can be selected if the chance-up display flag is set, and a table is created in which a preview suggesting an additional image cannot be selected unless the chance-up display flag is set. use.

(5) The performance determining means 303 determines the preview content of the first pseudo performance by lottery. The contents of the process are the same as in (4) above. Although the chance-up display flag is set in (3), if a preview including an additional image suggestion is not selected as a preview of the pseudo 2 effect, the effect determining means 303 displays an additional image suggestion as a preview of the pseudo 1 effect. Select the notices to include.

Another example of the lottery method for the pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. The production determining means 303 can select a pseudo-continuous pattern stop suggestion notice (in other words, a notice suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-continuation) as a notice for the pseudo-1 production, while selecting a pseudo-continuation pattern stop suggestion as a notice for the pseudo-2 production and onwards. It may be a configuration in which selection is not possible (or selection is possible with very low probability). Similarly, the effect determining means 303 can select an additional image suggestion as a preview of pseudo 1 effect, but cannot select an additional image suggestion as a preview of pseudo 2 effect or later (or it can be selected with a very low probability). ) configuration. It should be noted that any notice for increasing the chance other than the additional image that waits until the chance-up performance during the above-mentioned reach (for example, a notice of a high expectation pattern of a pseudo-continuous pattern) can be selected with a predetermined probability. Good too. Normally, during the pseudo 2 performance, the player watches the performance with a sense of expectation, ``Will it go all the way to the pseudo 3 performance?'' Therefore, if a pseudo continuous symbol stop suggestion can be selected in the pseudo 2 performance, there is no pseudo continuous symbol stop suggestion. This is because there is a great sense of excitement when it happens.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a table for determining the mode of pseudo-continuous performance. The effect determining means 303 determines a sub-variation pattern according to the results of the validity judgment, symbol judgment, and pattern judgment by the main board 200, and determines whether or not to execute the X notice in the route lottery based on the sub-variation pattern. do. The effect determining means 303 decides to execute the X notice, and if the result of the judgment is negative, determines the notice pattern with reference to the table of FIG. 64(a). On the other hand, the effect determining means 303 determines to execute the X notice, and when the result of the judgment is a jackpot, determines the notice pattern with reference to the table in FIG. 64(b). The table in this figure may be used, for example, in (3) to (5) of the above lottery method.

In the tables of FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), sub fluctuation patterns are arranged horizontally and preview patterns are arranged vertically. "Normal R" in the sub-variation pattern indicates a normal reach (a reach with a relatively low expectation of a jackpot), and "SP" indicates a super reach (a reach with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot). Furthermore, among the preview patterns, "Pattern A" to "Pattern C" are patterns that have no pseudo-connection suggestion or additional image suggestion (there are neither the lines 802 nor the lines 804 in FIG. 61). "Pattern D" and "Pattern E" are patterns that have a pseudo-connection suggestion but no additional image suggestion (only the lines 802 in FIG. 61). "Pattern F" is a pattern in which there is both a pseudo-connection suggestion and an additional image suggestion before a temporary stop, and an additional image display at the time of a temporary stop (the lines 802 and 804 in FIG. 61, and the character 808 in FIG. 62).

The values in the table are assigned numbers (also referred to as selection probabilities), and the tables in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b) can also be referred to as assigned number tables. For example, if the validity judgment result is incorrect (Fig. 64(a)) and the sub-variation pattern is normal variation (no pseudo-continuous effect, no reach), pattern A will be selected with a probability of 500/1000. It shows. A value "-" in the table indicates that no position number is assigned, in other words, the selection probability is zero. Note that in FIG. 64, a small number of about 1 to 3 may be assigned to the part indicated by "-".

A pseudo-continuation suggestion notice that suggests that a pseudo-continuation effect will be performed before the pseudo-continuation pattern is temporarily stopped is displayed when Pattern D, Pattern E, or Pattern F is selected. . Moreover, Pattern D, Pattern E, and Pattern F can be selected when the sub variation patterns are "with pseudo and no reach", "normal R with pseudo", and "SP with pseudo". Therefore, in the table of FIG. 64, the display probability of a pseudo-coupling effect is 100% when a pseudo-coupling suggestion preview is displayed. On the other hand, the pseudo-association suggestion preview is not displayed when pattern A, pattern B, or pattern C is selected. In this case, the sub fluctuation pattern may be any of the following: "normal fluctuation", "with pseudo and no reach", "normal R without pseudo", "normal R with pseudo", and "SP with pseudo". The display probability of continuous effects is less than 100%.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when the pseudo-continuation suggestion notice is displayed before the pseudo-continuation symbol is temporarily stopped, the probability is higher than when the pseudo-continuation suggestion notice is not displayed. Display pseudo-continuous effects. By displaying a pseudo-continuation suggestion notice before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation pattern, it is possible to draw the attention of the player not only to the number of pseudo-continuation presentations (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also to the content of the notice. It is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable performance including the performance.

It is when pattern F is selected that an additional image (in the above example, the character 808) different from the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the pseudo-continuous effect. Further, pattern F can be selected when the sub-fluctuation pattern is "Normal R with pseudo" (only in case of jackpot) or "SP with pseudo" (common for misses and jackpots). On the other hand, among all the sub-variation patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), there is a possibility that a pattern other than pattern F will be selected, that is, there is a possibility that the additional image will not be displayed in the pseudo continuous effect.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the twelfth embodiment, when a character 808 different from the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the pseudo-continuous presentation, the presentation following the pseudo-continuous presentation (for example, super reach presentation) results in a jackpot. The configuration is such that the expectation level is higher than when the character 808 is not displayed. As a result, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested not only by the number of pseudo-continuous performances (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also by displaying an additional image during the pseudo-continuous performance, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-continuous performance. Can be done.

A first modification will be explained. In the pseudo-continuous presentation of the above embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern (the pattern indicating "NEXT") as the decorative pattern 506 is temporarily stopped. As a modified example, the pseudo-continuous performance may temporarily stop a plurality of decorative symbols 506 (normal decorative symbols imitating numbers) with a special combination showing pseudo-continuous variation. In this modification, if the effect display control means 305 displays the pseudo-coupling suggestion notice before stopping and displaying the plurality of decorative patterns 506 in the above-mentioned special combination, the performance display control means 305 will To display a pseudo continuous effect with high probability. The above-mentioned special combination may be, for example, "3, 3, 4" (misalignment) or "1, 2, 3" (normal). This modification is applicable not only to the twelfth embodiment but also to other embodiments. In that case, the special combination of the plurality of decorative patterns 506 may be used as a performance development image (performance development pattern).

A second modification will be explained. The pseudo continuous performance pattern may be determined such that the content added when the symbols are temporarily stopped is related to the content of the button performance during the ready-to-win performance. In addition, the additional image (character 808 here) that is added when the symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo 1 effect is not displayed on standby in the corner of the screen after the pseudo 2 effect, but after the pseudo 2 effect. It may be displayed in the background. For example, character B, which was displayed during a temporary stop in pseudo 1 performance (the background is character A only), is added to the background of pseudo 2 and subsequent performances (the background is characters A + B), and it is displayed during a temporary stop in pseudo 2 performance. The character C may be added to the background of pseudo 3rd performance and later (the background is characters A+B+C).

The pseudo-continuous performance pattern allows characters displayed in the background (characters A, B, and C above) to be displayed after reach development (such as cut-in notices and It may also be specified to be displayed on a button display, etc.). In addition, the pseudo continuous performance pattern that can be selected at the time of a jackpot is such that characters displayed in the background are displayed in the performance after reach development (cut-in notice, button performance, etc.) with a higher probability than characters that have not been added. May be specified. Furthermore, the expectation level of the jackpot is as follows: The main character who is in the background from the beginning (Character A above) > The character added to the background during pseudo 3 performance (Character C above) > The character added to the background during pseudo 2 performance (Character B above) A plurality of pseudo-continuous performance patterns and the selection probability of each pattern may be set. Note that this jackpot expectation level may be reversed depending on the character's appearance; for example, character B with a red aura may be set to have a higher jackpot expectation level than character C with a blue aura. good.

A third modification will be explained. In the pseudo-continuous performance of the above embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern as the decorative pattern 506 is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, in the pseudo-continuous performance of the first modification, a plurality of decorative patterns 506 are stopped in a special combination. As a modification, the pseudo-continuous performance pattern may define a story-type pseudo-continuous performance (also referred to as a flashback pseudo-continuous performance). The story-type pseudo-continuous performance is a pseudo-continuous performance with contents that are successively stepped up in pseudo-1 performance, pseudo-2 performance, pseudo-3 performance, etc. For example, it is a type of pseudo continuous performance that progresses (continues) when each step is successful, such as pseudo 1 performance and pseudo 2 performance.

In story-type pseudo-continuous performances, players focus on whether or not a successful result is displayed in each step such as pseudo 1st performance, pseudo 2nd performance, etc., so additional images at the time of temporary stop and advance notice of pseudo-continuous suggestions It is desirable to hide. Therefore, in the preview determination table shown in FIG. 64, the number of preview patterns for the story-type pseudo-continuation performance may be set to be the same as in the case without pseudo-continuation (for example, "Normal R without pseudo-continuation, etc."). Furthermore, when a sub-variation pattern that executes a story-type pseudo-continuous performance is selected, the X preview may not be won.

<13th example>
The present embodiment will be explained below, focusing on the underlying technology and the points that are different from the first to twelfth embodiments, and the explanation of the common points will be omitted. It goes without saying that the features of the thirteenth embodiment can be arbitrarily combined with the features of the base technology, the first to twelfth embodiments, and the modified examples.

The pachinko game machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment executes a so-called fast-pressing effect as a button effect. Specifically, if the effect button 109 is pressed quickly during the quick effect effect period and the ally character is activated before the enemy character, the result is a success. On the other hand, if the performance button 109 is pressed during the introduction performance period before the fast-press performance period, it will be delayed and result in a failure. Therefore, in the button performance in the thirteenth embodiment, the light emission of the button lamp is controlled so as to suppress button operations by the player during the introduction performance period.

Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment includes a light emitting means (referred to as a "button lamp" in the embodiment) provided on the production button 109 as an operation input means. The effect determining means 303 is capable of determining an operation input effect (referred to as a "button effect" in the embodiment) that requests the player to input an operation to the effect button 109 as the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60. For example, the button effect may be determined by lottery. The above-mentioned button effect is a period in which operation input to the effect button 109 is valid (a period in which button operations are effectively accepted, that is, a "button operation valid period"), and a first valid period and after the first valid period. including a second validity period provided. The second valid period is a period during which the player should input a button operation as soon as possible, while the first valid period is a period during which the player should not input a button operation (a period in which the player is left with no input). The effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to emit light during the second valid period, and does not emit light from the button lamp during the first valid period.

The thirteenth embodiment will be described in detail below. FIG. 65 shows a display example of button effects in the thirteenth embodiment. 65(a) and 65(b) show an introduction effect within the button effect 820, and FIG. 65(c) shows a quick press effect within the button effect 820. In the first stage of the introductory effect shown in FIG. 65(a), an ally character 822, an enemy character 824, and a button image 500 are displayed, and if the ally character 822 can grab the donut in the center of the screen first by pressing the button quickly, A game explanation indicating that the game will be a success is provided by video or audio.

Further, in the latter part of the introduction effect shown in FIG. 65(b), the button image 500 is temporarily hidden. In the quick press effect shown in FIG. 65(c), a button image 500 larger in size than the button image 500 displayed before the introduction effect is displayed, and a video or audio indicating the start of the quick press effect is output. As a modified example, the button effect has a configuration in which the button image 500 is hidden in the first stage of the introduction effect, a small button image 500 fades into the screen in the second stage of the introduction effect, and the button image 500 is enlarged in the quick press effect. There may be.

FIG. 66 is a time chart schematically showing the presentation process of the button presentation in the thirteenth embodiment. 66(a) to 66(f) correspond to FIGS. 50(a) to 50(f). This figure shows a performance process using a variable performance pattern (hereinafter also referred to as "button performance pattern") including a button performance.In other words, when a button performance pattern is selected by the performance determination means 303, the performance control means 304 It shows the process of button production to be executed.

When the button performance pattern is selected by the performance determining means 303, the performance display control means 305 starts an introductory performance in the button performance, as shown in FIG. 66(b) (S1900). In the introduction performance, as shown in FIG. 65(a), a game explanation such as "Press the button quickly" is displayed (S1901), and a button image 500 is also displayed (S1930). Next, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the effect display control means 305 displays a preparation instruction (also referred to as a standby instruction) such as "Okay" indicating that the quick press effect will start soon (S1902). . Subsequently, the effect display control means 305 starts a quick press effect (S1903) and displays the button image 500 again (S1931), as shown in FIG. 65(c).

The button image 500 in S1931 is displayed larger than the button image 500 in S1930. Further, the button image 500 in S1930 is displayed in a manner that suggests that the button operation is not valid, such as gray display, while the button image 500 in S1931 is displayed in a manner that suggests that the button operation is not valid (for example, a game Displayed in colors, etc. that easily attract the attention of people.

In the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment, the button validity period is from the latter part of the introduction effect (ie, the start of S1902) to the end of the quick press effect (ie, the end of S1903). The button validity period during the introduction presentation is determined as the first validity period (S1910), and the button validity period during the quick press presentation is determined as the second validity period (S1911). The second valid period is a period during which a quick press of the production button 109 is required, but the button operation valid period starts before the second valid period. The button effect pattern determines that the button lamp does not emit light during the first valid period, and that the button lamp emits light during the second valid period. The effect display control means 305 makes the button lamp not emit light during the first valid period, and causes the button lamp to emit white light during the second valid period (S1920).

When the production button 109 is pressed during the second valid period (S1940), the second valid period ends and the audio control means 306 outputs an operation sound (S1950). The plurality of types of button performance patterns that can be selected by the performance determining means 303 include a button performance pattern that results in success (also referred to as a success pattern) and a button performance pattern that results in failure (also referred to as a failure pattern). The effect display control means 305 displays a result effect depending on whether the button effect pattern is a success pattern or a failure pattern and the operation timing of the effect button 109 (S1904). The result performance includes a success performance and a failure performance.

In the success pattern, the enemy character 824 starts moving one second after the start of the quick press effect in S1903. Therefore, if the performance button 109 is pressed within one second after the start of the quick press performance, a successful performance will be displayed. On the other hand, if the performance button 109 is pressed 1 second after the start of the fast press performance, or if the performance button 109 is not pressed during the fast press performance, failure performance A is displayed. Successful performances include reach performances after the development of the production, changes in pending images (changes to high expectations, etc.), and pseudo-continuous production (story-type pseudo (continuous performance). The failure effect A may display a smiling face of the enemy character 824 (competing character) together with a message indicating the defeat of the ally character 822.

In the failure pattern, the enemy character 824 starts moving (takes the donut) immediately after the start of the quick push effect in S1903, so the ally character 822 (ie, the player) is always defeated. In this case as well, the above-mentioned failure effect A is displayed. As a modification, in the failure pattern, the operation input to the performance button 109 may be disabled in both the introduction performance and the fast press performance (or at least the fast press performance). In this modification as well, it is preferable that the light emission mode of the button lamp and the display mode of the button image 500 be the same as in the above embodiment. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the button operation is effective, and it is possible to encourage the player to operate the button even in a failure pattern.

If the performance button 109 is pressed during the button validity period (ie, the first validity period) during the introductory performance during which button operations should not be performed, the result is a so-called "neglect". In this case, the effect display control means 305 displays failure effect B according to the button effect pattern. The failure performance B is different in content from the failure performance A, and may display content such as "You're done! The match will be forfeited!". Moreover, the failure performance B may be such that the ally character 822 or the enemy character 824 performs a different action from the failure performance A.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the player performs a predetermined operation, even if the player's operation is not actually input to the operation input device (the production button 109, etc.), the player's operation can be performed. It is possible to set an automatic operation function (hereinafter also referred to as "auto button") that assumes that the input has been made and proceeds with the production. Further, in the button effect of the thirteenth embodiment, when the automatic operation function is enabled, that state is maintained and is not automatically canceled. The effect display control means 305 determines whether the operation input during the first valid period of the button effect (button operation in the embodiment) is based on an actual player operation or whether the automatic operation function is set to be valid. The contents of the presentation are varied depending on whether it is determined that there is an operation input (in other words, whether it is input by the automatic operation function). That is, in the button performance pattern, different contents are defined for a manual performance resulting from the automatic operation function being enabled and a manual performance resulting from an actual player operation.

Specifically, when the auto button is valid and a button operation is automatically input during the first valid period, the effect display control means 305 displays a failure effect C. The failure performance C is different in content from both the failure performance A and the failure performance B, and may display content such as "Cheating is not good!", for example. Moreover, the failure performance C may be such that the ally character 822 or the enemy character 824 performs a different action from the failure performance A and the failure performance B. Further, the failure performance C may include content that urges the player to release the auto button. In this way, when the auto button is enabled, you are forced to take care of it. Therefore, the performance display control means 305 may display content recommending the release of the auto button by a caption or a cut-in during the introduction performance (for example, during the game explanation before the first validity period). The presentation process may be determined by a button presentation pattern.

Further, if the success pattern of the button performance is selected by the performance determining means 303, and the button operation is manually or automatically input during the first valid period, the performance display control means 305 selects the failure performance B or After the failure performance C is displayed, a reversal performance may be displayed to lead to a successful performance (SP reach development, etc.) without making the player feel uncomfortable, and such a performance process is defined as at least one success pattern. It's okay to be hit. The reversal effect may be such that, for example, a third character different from the ally character 822 and the enemy character 824 appears, and the third character wins over the enemy character 824 in place of the ally character 822.

Also, if the success pattern of the button performance is selected by the performance determining means 303, and the button operation is not input during the second valid period, or the input timing is late (for example, the button operation is not performed after 1 second has elapsed). After displaying the failed performance A, the performance display control means 305 may display the above reversal performance in order to lead to a successful performance (SP reach development, etc.) without making the player feel uncomfortable. Often, such a presentation process may be defined as at least one success pattern. In addition, the content of the success effect will be a chance regardless of whether the button operation is input manually or automatically during the first validity period, or when the button operation is not input or the input timing is late during the second validity period. If the importance is relatively low, such as an up notice, a success pattern may be provided in which the reversal effect is not displayed and the successful effect is canceled.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the 13th embodiment, the light emitting means is made to emit light during the second validity period in which an operation input to the performance button 109 is requested, while the light emission means is emitted during the first validity period in which no operation input to the performance button 109 is to be performed. is non-emissive. This makes it easier to prevent the player from misperceiving that an operation input to the production button 109 is required during the first valid period. can be appropriately notified.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine 100 of the thirteenth embodiment, the button effect when the auto button is enabled displays different contents from the button effect when the auto button is disabled. As a result, it is possible to provide an incentive to release the auto button and watch other effects, encourage the release of the auto button, and also encourage player participation in other button effects (i.e., button operations by the player). can be encouraged. Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the button performance, it becomes easier to create a sense of accomplishment when obtaining a successful performance.

A first modification will be explained. The button effect of the 13th embodiment includes a quick press effect, and is designed to request a quick press operation from a certain timing (at the start of the second valid period) during the valid period of a series of button operations, but the effect is shown in the effect image. In a button presentation that provides a second validity period for giving a main change related to the main change, and a first validity period arranged before the second validity period, the operation timing and operation mode in the button operation validity period are Other types of combinations are also possible.

For example, for a button effect, like a rocket start in a racing game, the condition for success (or a condition for winning or executing a successful effect) is to continue pressing and holding the effect button 109 from a certain timing during the operation validity period. It may be something that does. In this case, if the performance button 109 is pressed too early (by mistake) or the timing of pressing the performance button 109 is too late, a failure may be determined and the successful performance may be hidden or the failed performance may be displayed.

In addition, the button performance is performed by pressing and holding the performance button 109 during the button operation valid period (during the first valid period), and then releasing the performance button 109 at a certain timing (second valid period) (the pressing has ended). In some cases, results indicating success or failure may be displayed. Furthermore, the button presentation is performed using a second operation means different from the first operation means (e.g. presentation button 109) used for the quick press to trigger the transition to a quick press period (e.g., second valid period) during the button presentation. (For example, the cross key 110 or the lever 112) may be configured to be an operation input.

A second modification will be explained. The button effect of the thirteenth embodiment causes the button lamp to emit light during the second valid period, and causes the button lamp to not emit light during the first valid period. As a modified example, the effect display control means 305 causes the button lamp to emit light in a predetermined manner (herein referred to as "valid manner") indicating that the operation input to the effect button 109 is valid during the second validity period, During the first valid period, the button lamp may be caused to emit light in a manner different from the predetermined manner (herein referred to as an "invalid manner").

An effective mode may be to make the button lamp emit white light as in the thirteenth embodiment, or it may be made to emit gold or rainbow color light as a mode that tends to attract the attention of the players. The invalid mode may be a mode that is less conspicuous than the effective mode, and may be a mode in which a button lamp emits light in gray or blue, or a light emission for the purpose of expressing an effect in conjunction with other effect lamps. Similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the configuration of the second modification also makes it easier to prevent the player from misperceiving that an operation input to the production button 109 is required during the first validity period.In other words, The period during which the performance button 109 should be operated in the button performance can be appropriately notified to the player.

The technical idea of the thirteenth embodiment is also useful for a reel-type gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "slot machine") equipped with an operation input device (performance button, etc.) related to performance. The normal game of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 corresponds to the normal game of the slot machine, and the special game of the Pachinko gaming machine 100 corresponds to the bonus game (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) of the slot machine. In a slot machine, a bonus game is executed when a lottery by a lottery means indicates that a shift to a bonus game is possible and the reels are stopped.

The present invention has been described above based on examples. Those skilled in the art will understand that this embodiment is merely an illustration, and that various modifications can be made to the combinations of these components and processing processes, and that such modifications are also within the scope of the present invention. be. For example, in a modified example, the present invention may be applied to a slot machine, a game machine, and other game machines.

Note that the techniques described in the examples and modifications may be specified by the following aspects.
[First aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
In the special performance pattern, a performance process that can be developed over a plurality of performance stages is defined, and in each of the plurality of performance stages, which one of a plurality of types of operation means images representing the operation means is displayed. a display mode pattern that determines whether to perform the operation, and a condition for the operation mode for the operation means that must be satisfied in order to notify the development of the next performance or the performance result of the special performance pattern for each type of the operation means image. is,
The effect display control means causes an operation means image of a type determined by the display mode pattern to be displayed at a predetermined position in each of the plurality of effect stages when execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined. At the same time, a display suggesting contents defined in the conditions of the operation mode is displayed at a corresponding part of the displayed operation means image, and it is determined that the performance stage of the special performance pattern being executed can develop into the next performance. In this case, if the operation input of the operation means by the player satisfies the conditions of the operation mode, the development to the next effect is displayed and the type of the operation means image is changed to increase the expectation of jackpot. A pinball game machine characterized in that it can be changed to various types.

The "special performance pattern" in this embodiment may be a variable performance pattern that involves the establishment of a reach state in which three symbols are all the same with only one remaining symbol, and multiple types of performance patterns are prepared as the performance pattern. Ru. As for "multiple performance stages", a performance that can be developed from the first performance stage to the third performance stage is defined in one variable performance pattern, and the development to the next performance suggests an increase in the expectation level of jackpot. However, it is determined that the more stages there are, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. The plurality of types of special performance patterns include special performance patterns that are determined to develop up to the second performance stage, and special performance patterns that are determined not to develop beyond the second performance stage. However, as a modified example, if the production process that develops from the first production stage to the third production stage is standardized in a predetermined special production pattern, then the part of the third production stage does not develop to the third production stage. It may also be possible to control to replace the part with another performance, or to replace the part after the second performance stage with another performance without progressing to the second performance stage. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation for a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The "conditions of the operation mode" may be determined in the form of the amount of operation, such as the number of times the production button 109 is operated or the continuous operation time, and the amount of operation increases for each type of operation means image with a higher jackpot expectation. It may be determined as follows. However, the specification may be such that an opportunity to satisfy the "operation mode condition" with an exceptionally small amount of operation, such as "one press", is given at random and at a low frequency. In addition, as the "operation mode condition", the length of the valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the production button 109 is further determined, and the length of the valid period varies depending on the amount of operation required of the player. may be determined. The "corresponding location of the operating means image" is a nearby position where the correspondence with the operating means image is easy to understand from the appearance, and may be a nearby area adjacent to the operating means image in any direction. The "display that suggests the contents stipulated in the conditions of the operation mode" may display information that suggests at least one of the status of the operation amount and the status of the validity period, which are the conditions of the operation mode, for example. .

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the buttons, and to realize an innovative button performance that increases interest by preventing the player from getting bored with various operations.

[Second aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when the ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Fluctuation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which a symbol fluctuation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means is capable of determining execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content,
In the special effect pattern, after displaying one of a plurality of types of operation means images, each of which is an image suggesting a high level of expectation of a jackpot and showing the operation means, the operation by the player is performed. After displaying a first special performance pattern in which a production process for displaying a predetermined normal notice performance according to the operation of the means and a first operation means image having a common aspect with the operation means image, It is determined that the first operating means image is switched to a second operating means image of a type that suggests a higher level of jackpot expectation than the first operating means image in response to the player's operation of the operating means. a second special performance pattern,
When it is decided to execute a performance based on the first special performance pattern, the effect display control means displays any type of operation means image, and then displays the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means by the player. displays the normal preview performance, and if it is decided to execute the performance based on the second special performance pattern, after displaying the first operating means image at a predetermined position, the player operates the operating means. The first operating means image is switched to the second operating means image in response to an operation, and the second operating means image is made to stand by at a predetermined position on the screen for a subsequent production, and is made to stand by. A pinball game machine characterized in that a subsequent performance is executed using the second operation means image.

The "special performance pattern" in this aspect may be a variable performance pattern that involves the establishment of a reach state in which two of the three symbols are the same image and one more symbol is all the same image. A plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared as performance patterns. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation of a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The "image that has a common aspect with the operating means image" may be the same image as the "operating means image", or may be an image that has the same aspect as the same image except for some elements. . That is, it refers to images that are similar in appearance to the extent that the player cannot tell the difference at first glance. The "subsequent performance" may be a performance that suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than that of the "normal preview performance." Further, the "subsequent performance" may be a performance defined in the "second special performance pattern" that is executed immediately after switching the operating means image, or may be a performance defined in the "second special performance pattern". It may be a performance that is executed after the end of the base performance, or it may be a performance that is executed after one or more symbol variation performances are interposed. "Waiting" for the "second operating means image" may mean moving the "second operating means image" to a corner of the screen while maintaining its appearance, or moving the "second operating means image" to a corner of the screen, etc. You can reduce the size of `` and move it to the corner of the screen, or you can promote the type of ``second operating means image'' and display the word ``LOCK'' without moving it. Alternatively, it may be fixed (held) in place by wrapping a "chain" around it and displaying the word "HOLD". The "second special effect pattern" may be set such that the "normal preview effect" is displayed in response to the operation of the operating means and then switched to the "second operating means image", or Depending on the situation, it may be determined that the "normal preview effect" is not displayed and the display is switched to the "second operation means image". In both the "first special performance pattern" and the "second special performance pattern," if the player does not operate the operation means, the "normal preview performance" and the switching of the operation means image will not be displayed. may be controlled.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the button, and to realize an innovative button performance that increases interest by giving the role of a preview to the performance that makes the button image standby.

[Third aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
In the special effect pattern, after displaying one of a plurality of types of operation means images, each of which is an image suggesting a high level of expectation of a jackpot and showing the operation means, the player can perform the operation. When the first operation mode is performed on the means, a performance process is determined in which a predetermined normal preview performance is displayed, and when the operation means image to be displayed is of a predetermined type, the operation means is activated by the player. When a second operation mode different from the first operation mode is performed, the operation means image is evacuated to a predetermined position on the screen and left in place for the subsequent production, and the evacuated operation means image is It is determined that the subsequent performance using the
When it is decided to execute the performance based on the special performance pattern, the effect display control means displays an image of any type of operation means, and then controls the operation of the operation means by the player to the first type. If it is the operation mode, the normal preview performance is displayed, and if the operation of the operation means by the player is the second operation mode, the operation means image is evacuated to a predetermined position on the screen and left for the subsequent performance. , a pinball game machine characterized in that a subsequent performance is executed using the evacuated operation means image.

The "special performance pattern" in this aspect may be a variable performance pattern that involves the establishment of a reach state in which two of the three symbols are the same image and one more symbol is all the same, A plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared as performance patterns. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation of a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, the jackpot expectation may be set to increase in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The "operation mode" may be a mode of the amount of operation, such as the number of times the operation means is operated or the operation time. The "subsequent performance" may be a performance that suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than that of the "normal preview performance." Further, the "subsequent performance" may be a performance defined in the "second special performance pattern" that is executed immediately after switching the operating means image, or may be a performance defined in the "second special performance pattern". It may be a performance that is performed after the end of the base performance, or it may be a performance that is performed after one or more symbol variation performances are interposed. "Evacuation" of the "operation means image" may be to move it to a corner of the screen while maintaining the form of the "operation means image", or to reduce the size of the "operation means image" and display it on the screen. It may also be moved to a corner of the If the player does not operate the operating means, control may be performed so that the "normal preview performance" and the switching of the operating means images are not displayed.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the button, and also to realize a novel button performance that increases interest by allowing the player to store button images until a later performance at his or her discretion. .

[Fourth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined special performance condition is satisfied;
The special effect pattern includes a plurality of types, each of which is an image indicating the operating means and which can be switched to a predetermined preview effect image when the operating means is operated, each indicating a high expectation of a jackpot. any one of the operating means images is displayed, and each time a predetermined performance development condition is satisfied, the number of the displayed operating means images is increased to display a plurality of operating means images, and the plurality of operating means The images may include multiple types of operation means images, each of which suggests a high degree of jackpot expectation, and at least one of the operation means images suggests a relatively high degree of jackpot expectation, and each image may include a separate preview performance image. It was decided that the system would switch to
The effect display control means displays any type of operation means image when it is decided to perform the effect based on the special effect pattern, and displays the displayed operation every time the effect development condition is satisfied. A plurality of operation means images are displayed by increasing the number of means images, and when the operation means is operated, an effect is executed in which the one or more displayed operation means images are switched to an individual preview effect image. A pinball game machine characterized by:

The "special performance condition" may be a condition for selecting a special performance pattern as a performance pattern, and one of the conditions is that a variable pattern with a variable time corresponding to the performance time of the special performance pattern is selected. Alternatively, one of the conditions may be winning a lottery that determines the performance. The "special performance pattern" may be a variable performance pattern that involves the establishment of a ready-to-win state in which all three symbols are the same with only one remaining symbol, and a plurality of types of performance patterns are prepared as the performance pattern. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation of a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The initial display number of operation means images displayed with the effect based on the "special effect pattern" may be one or more. The "notice presentation image" is an image displayed as a predetermined notice presentation such as a comment notice, and a plurality of types of images may be prepared, each of which indicates a high degree of jackpot expectation. "Switching to a preview effect image" may be a change in the display mode such as the color, shape, or pattern of the button image, or may be a change in the operation means image itself with another type of operation means image, or , the displayed button image may be deleted and the display of the background preview effect may be switched. The "performance development condition" may be a condition that triggers an increase in the number of operation means images, and may be a condition that the player operates the operation means, or a condition such as the passage of a predetermined time or the arrival of a ball at a predetermined ball entrance. The condition may be the establishment of an event such as the ball entering the ball. "Each time it is satisfied" may be based on the assumption that the "effect development condition" is satisfied multiple times, but may also include a case where it is satisfied only once. "Proliferation" may indicate dividing or splitting one operating means image to change it into a plurality of operating means images, or may indicate adding one or more operating means images. Part or all of the displayed one or more operating means images is evacuated to a predetermined position on the screen to be used in the subsequent performance, and the subsequent performance is executed using the evacuated operating means images. You can do it like this. In that case, of the plurality of types of operating means images, only the operating means images of the type that suggest a relatively high jackpot expectation level may be saved.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the buttons, and to realize a novel button performance that increases interest by changing the number and types of button images to be multiplied.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The special effect pattern includes an effect using an operation means image that is an image indicating the operation means and that suggests that a predetermined effect can be executed when an operation is performed during a valid period of operation input of the operation means. At the same time, an effect is determined for displaying an operation preparation image indicating a waiting time until the start of the valid period, prior to the start of the valid period of the operation input of the operating means,
When it is decided to perform a performance based on the special performance pattern, the performance display control means displays the operation means image and executes a performance that starts displaying the operation preparation image prior to the start of the validity period. A pinball game machine characterized by:

The "special performance pattern" in this embodiment may be a performance pattern that is executed in a fluctuating performance that involves the establishment of a reach state in which three symbols are all the same with one more symbol, and multiple types of performance patterns are used as the performance pattern. A production pattern is prepared. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation for a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, the jackpot expectation may be set to increase in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The type of button image may be replaced in the middle of the performance by promoting it to a type with a relatively high expectation of jackpot, or the button image may be accompanied by a predetermined character image and that character image may be used. A button image replacement effect may also be performed. The "waiting time" may be the time required until the start of the valid period of the operation input of the operating means, or may indicate the time until a predetermined time point set before and after the start of the valid period. The temporal point may be, for example, the timing of a predetermined event, such as the output timing of a sound indicating the start of the valid period of the operation input of the operation means or the timing of lighting a lamp. Further, the "waiting time" may not be the actual time measured, but may be an apparent time displayed for presentation purposes.

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the button, and to realize a novel button performance that increases interest by providing a notice using a timer prior to the start of the valid period of button operation.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined special performance condition is satisfied;
The special performance pattern includes a preview performance that uses an image of the operation means that indicates that a predetermined performance can be executed when an operation is performed during the valid period of operation input of the operation means, which is an image that shows the operation means. is displayed, and if the operating means is operated within the validity period, the displayed operating means image is evacuated to a rendered area provided at a predetermined position on the screen and accumulated up to a predetermined limit; It is provided that the one or more accumulated operating means images can be used in subsequent performances;
The performance display control means displays the preview performance together with the operation means image when it is decided to execute the preview performance based on the special performance pattern, and displays the preview performance together with the operation means image, and displays the operation means if the operation means is operated within the valid period. In this case, the displayed operating means images are evacuated to the effected area and accumulated up to a predetermined limit, and when a predetermined subsequent effect condition is met, any of the one or more accumulated operating means images is A pinball game machine characterized by displaying a performance using a.

The "special performance condition" may be a condition for selecting a special performance pattern as a performance pattern, and one of the conditions is that a variable pattern with a variable time corresponding to the performance time of the special performance pattern is selected. Alternatively, one of the conditions may be winning a lottery that determines the performance. The "special performance pattern" may be a performance pattern that is executed in a fluctuating performance that involves the establishment of a reach state in which three symbols are all the same with only one remaining symbol, and multiple types of performance patterns are available as the performance pattern. It's okay to be. The "operation means image" may be a button image depicting the appearance of the operation means (for example, the effect button 109 or a button with a lever). The level of expectation of a jackpot for button images varies depending on the type of display mode, such as color, pattern, size, shape, etc. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of a white button image, a blue button image, a red button image, and a button image with a lever. The "predetermined limit" may be the upper limit of the number of buttons that can be stored, or may be the end of the time that can be stored. The "subsequent performance" may be a performance that suggests that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than that of the "preview performance." Further, the "subsequent performance" may be a performance defined in the "special performance pattern" that is executed immediately after the operation means image is evacuated, or may be a performance that is executed after the completion of the performance based on the "special performance pattern". It may be an effect that is executed after one or more symbol variation effects, or it may be an effect that is executed after one or more symbol variation effects, or at least one operation means image is displayed in the effected area. It suffices if it is a performance that is executed while the person is there. "Evacuation" of the "operation means image" may be to move it to a corner of the screen while maintaining the form of the "operation means image", or to reduce the size of the "operation means image" and display it on the screen. It may also be moved to a corner of the The storage in the "staged area" may be limited to a predetermined number. If a new operation means image is saved when the operation means images have been accumulated up to the upper limit, multiple accumulated operation means images may be saved. It is also possible to add a new image to the stored images after removing the oldest stored image among the operation means images. Although it is stated that "if the operation means is operated within the validity period," the operation means image may be stored in the rendered area even if no appropriate operation is performed within the validity period. .

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the button, and to realize a novel button performance that increases interest by accumulating button images that have already been performed.

[Seventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means determines execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The special performance pattern includes a preview performance that uses an image of the operation means that indicates that a predetermined performance can be executed when an operation is performed during the valid period of operation input of the operation means, which is an image that shows the operation means. is displayed, and an indicator for indicating the passage of the validity period in the preview presentation is to be displayed on the screen in a display mode according to the high expectation level of the jackpot,
The performance display control means displays the preview performance together with the operation means image when execution of the preview performance based on the special performance pattern is determined, and displays an indicator for indicating the passage of the valid period in the preview performance. A pinball game machine characterized in that a high expectation of a jackpot is indicated by displaying on a screen and displaying the elapsed validity period using an indicator.

"Elapse of the validity period" may refer to the elapsed time of the validity period, or may refer to the remaining time until the end of the validity period. The "indicator" may be displayed so that the value indicated by a predetermined indicator increases or decreases as an analog or continuous value as "the elapse of the validity period", or the value indicated by a predetermined indicator may be displayed digitally or as a continuous value. It may be displayed so as to increase or decrease discretely in units of a predetermined scale. The "display mode" may include the length, thickness, number, color, pattern, shape, increase/decrease direction, increase/decrease speed, increase/decrease unit of a predetermined index object as an "indicator", and how these change. .

According to this aspect, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the button, and to realize a novel button effect that increases interest by displaying the valid period of button operation in a different manner than usual. Can be done.

[Eighth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means is capable of determining execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content,
The special performance pattern includes a predetermined performance that includes a valid period of operation on the operating means, and when an operation on the operation means is input during the valid period of the preliminary performance, the expectation level of a jackpot is determined. It is stipulated that predetermined elements for executing the subsequent performance shown are to be accumulated based on the remaining period of the validity period,
The effect display control means displays the preceding effect when it is decided to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and when an operation is input to the operation means during the valid period of the preceding effect, the effect period is displayed. A pinball game machine characterized in that the subsequent performance is displayed in accordance with the accumulated elements based on the remaining period of the game.

According to this aspect, by quickly completing the operation on the operating means in the preceding performance, content with high expectations is more likely to be displayed in the subsequent performance, so that the player's motivation to operate the operating means can be effectively increased, In other words, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to participate in the production by operating the operating means. Further, since it is possible to change the degree of chance improvement in the subsequent performance depending on the player's participation status in the preceding performance (operation status of the operating means), it is possible to improve expectations in the variable performance.

[Ninth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means is capable of determining execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content,
The special effect pattern is a preceding effect that includes a valid period of operation on the operating means, and when an operation on the operating means is input during the valid period, a special image that suggests the development of the effect is displayed. It is determined that a preceding performance is to be executed, and that the content of a subsequent performance that indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot is varied depending on the operation mode input to the operating means during the display period of the special image,
The effect display control means displays the preceding effect when it is decided to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and displays the special image when an operation is input to the operating means during the valid period of the advance effect. The pinball game machine is characterized in that the following effects are displayed with different contents depending on an operation mode input to the operation means during the display period of the special image.

According to this aspect, when the development of the performance is suggested by the operation on the operating means, the player can arbitrarily select the performance form after the development according to the operation mode on the operating means during the suggestion. Thereby, the contents of the variable performance can be adjusted according to the player's preferences, so that the overall interest of the variable performance can be increased.

[Aspect 10-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means is capable of determining execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content,
The special effect pattern includes simultaneous execution of a plurality of special effects that prompt operation inputs to the operating means, and each of the plurality of special effects includes an operation mode for the operating means to advance each effect. There are different cases,
The effect display control means causes the plurality of special effects to be displayed simultaneously when execution of the effect based on the special effect pattern is determined, and when an operation is input to the operation means while displaying the plurality of special effects. In this case, a pinball game machine is characterized in that, among the plurality of special effects being displayed, a special effect corresponding to an operation mode input to the operating means can be advanced.

According to this aspect, the player can arbitrarily select a special performance to proceed from among a plurality of special performances displayed simultaneously. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the interest of the entire variable performance including the operation input to the operation means.

[Aspect 10-2]
In the tenth aspect, the special effect pattern may have a valid period of operation on the operation means. The effect display control means is capable of proceeding with another special effect in response to a new operation input to the operation means, even after one special effect has progressed, as long as it is within the validity period. Good too.

According to this aspect, since it is possible to proceed with another special performance even after one special performance ends, it is possible to increase the interest of the entire variable performance including the operation input to the operating means.

[Eleventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
a performance display device for displaying the content of the performance;
production determining means for determining production content to be displayed on the production display device;
Effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determining means on the effect display device;
an operation means for accepting operation input from a player;
The performance determining means is capable of determining execution of a performance based on a special performance pattern as the performance content,
The special performance pattern includes a special performance including a valid period of operation on the operation means, and is defined to execute a special performance in which one of a first scenario and a second scenario can be selected;
The effect display control means displays the special effect when it is decided to execute the effect based on the special effect pattern, and performs a selection operation of selecting the first scenario during the valid period of the special effect; When a confirmation operation for confirming the selection of a scenario is input, content corresponding to the first scenario is displayed as the content of the special effect, and a predetermined cancel operation is performed after inputting a selection operation for selecting the first scenario. A pinball game machine characterized in that, when input is made, content corresponding to the second scenario is displayed as the content of the special performance.

According to this aspect, even after the first scenario is once selected, the transition to the second scenario is made by inputting a predetermined cancel operation, thereby increasing the flexibility in selecting the content of the performance.

[Aspect 12-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured such that, as the performance content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, a re-variation display is performed, whereby a plurality of symbol variations are executed in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation effect that looks like this is displayed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop, the effect display control means is configured to display a notice that indicates that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed, compared to a case where the notice is not displayed. A pinball game machine characterized in that the pseudo continuous variation performance is displayed with a high probability.

According to this aspect, by displaying a notice suggesting that a pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, not only the number of pseudo continuous variation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the preview contents, and it is possible to increase the interest of the entire variable presentation including the pseudo continuous variable presentation.

[Aspect 12-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured to display a temporary symbol that is different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, as the production content, and then display the symbol a plurality of times in a pseudo manner by performing a re-variation display. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed that makes it appear as if a variation has been executed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance is higher than when the notice is not displayed. A pinball game machine characterized in that the pseudo continuous variation performance is displayed with probability.

According to this aspect, by displaying a notice suggesting that a pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the temporary stop of the special symbol, not only the number of pseudo continuous variation effects (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also It is possible to draw the attention of the player to the preview contents, and it is possible to increase the interest of the entire variable presentation including the pseudo continuous variable presentation.

[Aspect 13-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured such that, as the performance content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, a re-variation display is performed, whereby a plurality of symbol variations are executed in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation effect that looks like this is displayed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop, the effect display control means is configured to display a notice that indicates that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed, compared to a case where the notice is not displayed. display the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with a high probability,
When displaying an additional image different from the plurality of decorative patterns in the pseudo continuous variation performance, the effect display control means may display a notice related to the additional image in a performance subsequent to the pseudo continuous variation effect, and a jackpot. A pinball game machine characterized by displaying a notice indicating that expectations for the game have increased.

According to this aspect, the occurrence of a temporary stop is indicated by a notice before the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance, and the content of the performance executed after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance is also during the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance. make suggestions. This increases the relevance (in other words, sense of unity) of the entire variable performance including the pseudo-continuously variable performance, so that it is possible to effectively suggest the degree of jackpot expectation in the overall flow of the variable performance.

[Aspect 13-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured to display a temporary symbol that is different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, as the production content, and then display the symbol a plurality of times in a pseudo manner by performing a re-variation display. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed that makes it appear as if a variation has been executed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance is higher than when the notice is not displayed. Displaying the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with probability,
When displaying an additional image different from the special symbol in the pseudo continuous variation performance, the performance display control means is configured to display a notice related to the additional image in a performance subsequent to the pseudo continuous variation performance, in order to increase the expectation of a jackpot. A pinball game machine characterized by displaying a notice indicating that the level has increased.

According to this aspect, the occurrence of a temporary stop is indicated by a notice before the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance, and the content of the performance executed after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance is also during the pseudo continuous fluctuation performance. make suggestions. This increases the relevance (in other words, sense of unity) of the entire variable performance including the pseudo-continuously variable performance, so that it is possible to effectively suggest the degree of jackpot expectation in the overall flow of the variable performance.

[Aspect 14-1]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured such that, as the performance content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, a re-variation display is performed, whereby a plurality of symbol variations are executed in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation effect that looks like this is displayed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop, the effect display control means is configured to display a notice that indicates that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed, compared to a case where the notice is not displayed. display the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with a high probability,
When an additional image different from the plurality of decorative patterns is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation performance, the expectation level that the performance following the pseudo continuous variation performance will result in a jackpot is higher than when the additional image is not displayed. A pinball game machine characterized by:

According to this aspect, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be suggested not only by the number of pseudo continuous variation performances (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also by displaying an additional image during the pseudo continuous variation production, can increase interest.

[Aspect 14-2]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured to display a temporary symbol that is different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, as the production content, and then display the symbol a plurality of times in a pseudo manner by performing a re-variation display. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed that makes it appear as if a variation has been executed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance is higher than when the notice is not displayed. Displaying the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with probability,
When an additional image different from the special symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation performance, the expectation level that the performance following the pseudo continuous variation performance will result in a jackpot is higher than when the additional image is not displayed. Features a pinball game machine.

According to this aspect, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be suggested not only by the number of pseudo continuous variation performances (in other words, the number of temporary stops) but also by displaying an additional image during the pseudo continuous variation production, can increase interest.

[Aspect 15-1]
A lottery means that uses a predetermined gaming operation as a trigger to perform a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game;
special game control means for executing the special game when a lottery by the lottery means results in a result indicating that transition to the special game is possible and a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an operation input device that accepts operation input from a player;
a light emitting means provided in the operation input device;
Equipped with
The performance determining means is capable of determining, as the performance content, an operation input performance that requests the player to input an operation to the operation input device,
The operation input performance includes a first period and a second period provided after the first period as a period in which the operation input to the operation input device is valid,
The gaming machine causes the light emitting means to emit light during the second period, and does not emit light during the first period.

According to this aspect, the light-emitting means emits light during the second period in which an operation input to the operation means is requested, while the light-emission means does not emit light during the first period in which no operation input to the operation means is required. This makes it easier to prevent the player from misperceiving that the operation input to the operation means is required during the first period. Appropriate notifications can be made.

[Aspect 15-2]
A lottery means that uses a predetermined gaming operation as a trigger to perform a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game;
special game control means for executing the special game when a lottery by the lottery means results in a result indicating that transition to the special game is possible and a predetermined condition is satisfied;
a performance determining means for determining the content of the performance;
an operation input device that accepts operation input from a player;
a light emitting means provided in the operation input device;
Equipped with
The performance determining means is capable of determining, as the performance content, an operation input performance that requests the player to input an operation to the operation input device,
The operation input performance includes a first period and a second period provided after the first period as a period in which the operation input to the operation input device is valid,
In the second period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner indicating that the operation input to the operation input device is valid, and in the first period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner different from the predetermined manner. A game machine that emits light.

According to this aspect, in the second period in which an operation input to the operation means is requested, the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner indicating that the operation input to the operation input device is valid, while the operation input to the operation means is In the first period in which the light is not required, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a manner different from the above-mentioned predetermined manner. This makes it easier to prevent the player from misperceiving that the operation input to the operation means is required during the first period. Appropriate notifications can be made.

Reference Signs List 11 first starting port, 12 second starting port, 60 effect display device, 80 game board, 221 first success/failure judgment means, 222 second judgment means, 260 special game control means, 303 effect determination means, 305 effect display control Means, 500 button images.

Claims (2)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured such that, as the performance content, after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in one symbol variation, a re-variation display is performed, whereby a plurality of symbol variations are executed in a pseudo manner. It is possible to determine a pseudo continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous variation effect that looks like this is displayed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the plurality of decorative symbols are displayed in a temporary stop, the effect display control means is configured to display a notice that indicates that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed, compared to a case where the notice is not displayed. display the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with a high probability,
The execution mode of the temporary stop display effect, which is the effect displayed when the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo continuous variation effect, is one of the plurality of execution modes with different execution expectations of the special game. Crab is set,
The notice can display content that suggests that the execution mode of the temporary stop display performance in the pseudo continuous variation performance is an execution mode that indicates that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is relatively high;
Among the execution modes of the temporary stop display effect in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the execution mode in which the execution expectation level of the special game is relatively high is that the plurality of decorative symbols initially display a special image when the temporary stop display starts. A mode in which the special image is not displayed, and the special image is displayed when a predetermined operation means for influencing the performance is operated by the player after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed . A pinball game machine characterized by certain things. A game board on which a game area is formed;
a starting prize opening, which is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area, and where the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a win/fail determination means for executing a win/fail determination based on a lottery value for determining whether or not to proceed to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the starting prize opening; ,
a symbol display device in which a symbol for indicating the result of the validity determination is displayed in a fluctuating manner;
a symbol determining means for determining a symbol to be stopped and displayed on the symbol display device according to the result of the validity determination;
Variation pattern determining means for selecting one by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in which a symbol variation display process is determined;
special game control means that executes the special game when the result of the win/fail determination is a jackpot;
an effect display device in which a plurality of decorative patterns are variably displayed to express the result of the validity judgment;
performance determining means for determining performance content including variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns according to the variation pattern;
and effect display control means for displaying the effect content determined by the effect determination means on the effect display device,
The performance determining means is configured to display a temporary symbol that is different from the plurality of decorative symbols in one symbol variation, as the production content, and then display the symbol a plurality of times in a pseudo manner by performing a re-variation display. It is possible to determine a pseudo-continuous variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed that makes it appear as if a variation has been executed,
When the effect display control means displays a notice suggesting that the pseudo continuous variation effect will be performed before the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the performance is higher than when the notice is not displayed. Displaying the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect with probability,
The execution mode of the temporary stop display effect, which is the effect displayed when the special symbol temporarily stops displaying in the pseudo continuous variation effect, is one of a plurality of types of execution modes with different execution expectations of the special game. set,
The notice can display content that suggests that the execution mode of the temporary stop display performance in the pseudo continuous variation performance is an execution mode that indicates that the degree of expectation for execution of the special game is relatively high;
Among the execution modes of the temporary stop display performance in the pseudo continuous variation performance, the execution mode in which the execution expectation level of the special game is relatively high is that the special image is not displayed at the beginning when the special symbol starts the temporary stop display. A mode in which the special image is displayed when a predetermined operating means for influencing the performance is operated by the player after the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed . A pinball game machine.

Images